all | frequencies |
|
|
|
|
exhibits | applications |
---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
manuals |
app s | submitted / available | |||||||
---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
1 2 |
|
User Manual - IG | Users Manual | 1.41 MiB | ||||
1 2 |
|
User Manual - MG | Users Manual | 2.23 MiB | ||||
1 2 |
|
User Manual - QSG | Users Manual | 672.44 KiB | ||||
1 2 |
|
User Manual - Statements | Users Manual | 254.15 KiB | ||||
1 2 | Attestation Statements | |||||||
1 2 | Attestation Statements | |||||||
1 2 | Cover Letter(s) | |||||||
1 2 | Cover Letter(s) | |||||||
1 2 | External Photos | |||||||
1 2 | Internal Photos | |||||||
1 2 | ID Label/Location Info | |||||||
1 2 | ID Label/Location Info | |||||||
1 2 | RF Exposure Info | |||||||
1 2 | Test Report | |||||||
1 2 | Test Report | |||||||
1 2 | Test Setup Photos |
1 2 | User Manual - IG | Users Manual | 1.41 MiB |
INSTALLATION GUIDE 802.11a/b/g/n Outdoor Dual-Band Wireless Access Point SMC2890W-AN, SMC2891W-AN Outdoor Access Point Installation Guide No. 1, Creation Road III, Hsinchu Science Park, 30077, Taiwan, R.O.C. Tel: +886 3 5638888 Fax: +886 3 6686111 January 2013 Pub. # 149100000208A E012013-CS-R01 Information furnished by SMC Networks, Inc. (SMC) is believed to be accurate and reliable. However, no responsibility is assumed by SMC for its use, nor for any infringements of patents or other rights of third parties which may result from its use. No license is granted by implication or otherwise under any patent or patent rights of SMC. SMC reserves the right to change specifications at any time without notice. Copyright 2013 by SMC Networks, Inc. No. 1 Creation Road III, Hsinchu Science Park, 30077, Taiwan, R.O.C. All rights reserved Trademarks:
SMC is a registered trademark; and Barricade, EZ Switch, TigerStack, TigerSwitch, and TigerAccess are trademarks of SMC Networks, Inc. Other product and company names are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective holders. Warranty and Product Registration To register SMC products and to review the detailed warranty statement, please refer to the Support Section of the SMC Website at http://www.smc.com. 4 How to Use This Guide This guide includes detailed information on the Access Point (AP) hardware, including network ports, power, cabling requirements, as well as plug-in transceivers. This guide also provides general installation guidelines and recommended procedures. To deploy this AP effectively and ensure trouble-free operation, you should first read the relevant sections in this guide so that you are familiar with all its hardware components. Who Should Read This Guide?
This guide is for network administrators and support personnel that install, operate and maintain network equipment. The guide assumes a basic working knowledge of LANs (Local Area Networks) and can be read by those that are new to network equipment, or those with more experience. How This Guide is Organized This organization of this guide is based on the APs main hardware components. Each chapter includes information about a specific component with relevant specifications and installation procedures. An AP overview section is also provided. For Users New to APs If you are new to APs, it is recommended that you first read all chapters in this guide before installing the AP. For Experienced Users If you are already familiar with installing and operating network APs, Chapters 1 and 2 provide you with enough information to install the AP. Other chapters can be left for reference, when needed. The guide includes these chapters:
Chapter 1 - Access Point Overview Includes an AP overview, key component identification, and key technical specifications. Chapter 2 - Installation Overview Includes information on the package contents, system configuration, and an outline of AP installation tasks. Chapter 3 - AP Chassis Includes AP installaion for pole or wall, and external antenna connection. Chapter 4 - Power and Grounding Includes information on PoE power for the unit, AP grounding, and powering on the AP. Chapter 5 - Network Connections Includes information on network interfaces, installing optional transceivers, and cabling specifications. 5 How to Use This Guide Chapter 6 - AP Management Connecting to the AP for management and information on the system status LEDs. Appendix A - Troubleshooting Information for troubleshooting AP installation and operation. Related Documentation This guide focuses on AP hardware and installation, it does not cover software configuration of the AP. For specific information on how to operate and use the management functions of the AP, see the following guide:
Management Guide For all safety information and regulatory statements, see the following documents:
Quick Start Guide Safety and Regulatory Information Conventions The following conventions are used throughout this guide to show information:
Note: Emphasizes important information or calls your attention to related features or instructions. Caution: Alerts you to a potential hazard that could cause loss of data, or damage the system or equipment. Warning: Alerts you to a potential hazard that could cause personal injury. Revision History This section summarizes the changes in each revision of this guide. January 2013 Revision This is the first revision of this guide. 6 Contents Warranty and Product Registration How to Use This Guide Contents Figures Tables 1 Access Point Overview Hardware Description Key Hardware Components Key Technical Specifications 2 Installation Overview Package Contents System Configuration AP Installation Tasks 3 AP Chassis General Installation Guidelines Antenna Position Ethernet Cabling Radio Interference Weather Conditions How to Mount the Unit How to Pole Mount How to Connect External Antennas How to Align Antennas 4 Power and Grounding Power Injector Module 7 4 5 7 9 10 11 11 12 15 16 16 17 18 23 23 23 24 24 24 25 25 27 28 29 29 Contents How to Ground the Unit How to Install the Power Injector 5 Network Connections Understanding the Network Status LEDs How to Connect to Radio Interfaces How to Connect to the RJ-45 Port Copper Cabling Guidelines 10/100BASE-TX Pin Assignments 1000BASE-T Pin Assignments Connection Procedure Grounding the Ethernet Cable 6 AP Management Understanding the System Status LEDs How to Connect to the Console Port A Troubleshooting Diagnosing LED Indicators System Self-Diagnostic Test Failure Power Problems Installation Wireless Connection Problems In-Band Access Out-of-Band Access Reset the Access Point Index 8 31 32 35 36 36 37 37 37 38 39 41 43 44 45 47 47 47 47 48 48 48 49 49 50 Figures Installing the AP on a Pole Figure 1: SMC2891W-AN Outdoor Access Point Figure 2: Bottom Panel View Figure 3: Top Panel View (SMC2891W-AN) Figure 4: Power Injector Module Figure 5: System Configuration Figure 6:
Figure 7: Making a Connection to the RJ-45 Port Figure 8: Connecting AC Power Figure 9: System LEDs Figure 10: Console Port Figure 11: Attach Bracket to Pole Figure 12: Attach Bracket to AP Figure 13: Mount the AP on the Pole Figure 14: Connect External Antennas Figure 15: PoE Power Injector Figure 16: Ground Wire Connection Figure 17: Connecting the Power Injector Figure 18: Network Status LEDs Figure 19: Network Status LEDs Figure 20: RJ-45 Connector Figure 21: Waterproof RJ-45 Port Cover Figure 22: Making a Connection to the RJ-45 Port Figure 23: Outdoor-Rated Ethernet Cable Drain Wire Figure 24: System Status LEDs Figure 25: System Status LEDs Figure 26: Console Port Connection 9 11 12 13 14 17 18 19 20 20 21 25 26 26 27 29 31 32 36 36 37 40 41 42 44 44 46 Tables Table 1: Key Technical Specifications Table 2: Power Injector Module Specifications Table 3: Power Injector Module Status LED Table 4: 10/100BASE-TX MDI and MDI-X Port Pinouts Table 5: 1000BASE-T MDI and MDI-X Port Pinouts Table 6: Console Cable Wiring Table 7: Troubleshooting Chart 15 30 30 38 39 45 47 10 1 Access Point Overview This chapter includes these sections:
Hardware Description on page 11 Key Technical Specifications on page 15 Hardware Description The SMC2890W-AN/SMC2891W-AN outdoor access point (AP) is built with leading-
edge technology to deliver reliable high-performance connectivity for your data network. The SMC2890W-AN/SMC2891W-AN is a dual-band IEEE 802.a/b/g/n AP that is designed to deliver high-performance wireless services for clients or to provide bridge links between remote LANs. Housed in a weatherproof enclosure for mounting outdoors, the unit includes its own bracket for attaching to a pole, radio mast, or tower structure. The unit is powered through its Ethernet cable connection from a power injector module that is installed indoors. In addition, the AP offers full network management capabilities through an easy-
to-use web interface, a command-line interface, and support for Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) tools. Figure 1: SMC2891W-AN Outdoor Access Point 11 Chapter 1 | Access Point Overview Hardware Description Key Hardware Components The SMC2890W-AN/SMC2891W-AN consists of serveral key harware components. This manual describes each specific component, or related components, together with their installation requirements and procedures in each chapter. To understand each component in detail, refer to the relevant section. Figure 2: Bottom Panel View 1 2 5 3 4 1 2 3 Built-in 5 GHz Antenna (SMC2891W-AN only) Console Port with Waterproof Cover Back Panel System LEDs (Not Visible in Figure) 4 5 RJ-45 PoE Port Water-Tight Test Point (DO NOT REMOVE) Built-in 5 GHz Antenna The SMC2891W-AN AP includes an integrated 5 GHz antenna. For more information, see How to Align Antennas on page 28. Console Port The port labeled Console provides an out-of-band serial connection to a terminal or a PC running terminal emulation software. The port can be used for performing unit monitoring and configuration. For more information, see How to Connect to the Console Port on page 45. RJ-45 PoE Port The RJ-45 port labeled PoE provides a 1000BASE-T data and Power-over-Ethernet
(PoE) power connection to the unit. For more information, see How to Connect to the RJ-45 Port on page 37. 12 Chapter 1 | Access Point Overview Hardware Description System LEDs For information on system status LED indicators, see Understanding the System Status LEDs on page 44. Water-Tight Test Point Caution: Do not remove or loosen this screw. Doing so could lead to damage of the unit. Figure 3: Top Panel View (SMC2891W-AN) 1 1 2 External Antenna Connectors 3 Pole/Wall Bracket Attachment Point Ground Point 2 3 External Antenna Connectors The SMC2890W-AN AP unit includes four external antenna connectors, two are for the 2.4 GHz radio and two for the 5 GHz radio. The SMC2891W-AN AP unit includes three external antenna connectors, two are for the 2.4 GHz radio and one for the 5 GHz radio (the unit also includes a built-in 5 GHz antenna). For more information, see How to Connect External Antennas on page 27. Ground Point There is a ground point for grounding the AP chassis to earth. For more information, see How to Ground the Unit on page 31. 13 Chapter 1 | Access Point Overview Hardware Description Pole Mounting Bracket The included Mounting Bracket Kit can be used to mount the unit on a 1.5 to 6 inch diameter pole, or to part of a radio mast or tower structure. For more information, see How to Mount the Unit on page 25. Figure 4: Power Injector Module Power Injector Module The AP receives power through a PoE connection to its RJ-45 port. The PoE power is supplied from a power injector module that is installed indoors. For information, see Power Injector Module on page 29. 14 Chapter 1 | Access Point Overview Key Technical Specifications Key Technical Specifications The following table contains key system specifications for the AP. Table 1: Key Technical Specifications Item Ports Specification One 10/100/1000 Mbps RJ-45 port Network Interface RJ-45 Port: 1000BASE-T, PoE (PD) with waterproof cover Console Port 2.4GHz Radio 5 GHz Radio RS-232, RJ-45 waterproof connector IEEE 802.11b/g/n IEEE 802.11a/n External Antennas 4 N-Type female connecters (50 Ohms), 2x2 MIMO for 2.4 and 5 GHz Integrated Antenna
(SMC2891W-AN only) Radio Frequencies 12 dBi @ 5 GHz, panel type, horizontal polarization 2400 ~ 2483.5 MHz 2412 ~ 2472 MHz 5745 ~ 5825 MHz (China) 5180 ~ 5320 MHz (ETSI) 5500 ~ 5700 MHz (ETSI) LEDs Power/System, Ethernet, 2.4GHz, 5GHz PoE Input Power 38~57 VDC Power Consumption 25.5 W maximum for IEEE 802.3at 12.95 W maximum for IEEE 802.3af Weight Size Temperature Humidity Wind Velocity 1.7 kg (3.75 lbs), unit without bracket or external antennas W x D x H: 195 x 190 x 74 mm (7.68 x 7.48 x 2.91 inches) Operating: -10 C to 60 C (-14 F to 140 F) Storage: -20 C to 70 C (-4 F to 158 F) Operating: 10% to 95% (non-condensing) Operational: 100 MPH (Miles per hour) / 44 mps Survival: 150 MPH / 66 mps 15 2 Installation Overview This chapter includes these sections:
Package Contents on page 16 System Configuration on page 17 AP Installation Tasks on page 18 Package Contents After unpacking the AP, check the contents to be sure you have received all the components. SMC2890W-AN or SMC2891W-AN Outdoor Access Point Bracket Mounting Kit for pole mounting PoE Power Injector with power cordeither US, Continental Europe or UK Waterproof RJ-45 port cover Console cable (RJ-45 to DB-9) Quick Start Guide Regulatory and Safety Information Documentation CD includes Installation Guide and Management Guide Note that the following items are available options for the AP:
(Optional) Two external 2.4 GHz antennas
(Optional) One external 5 GHz antenna
(Optional) One mounting kit for 5 GHz external antenna
(Optional) 1.5 m low-loss 200 RF cable for 5 GHz external antenna 16 Chapter 2 | Installation Overview System Configuration System Configuration At each location where a unit is installed it must be connected to the local network, either by using the power injector module, or by a direct connection to an IEEE 802.3at-compliant LAN switch. The following figure illustrates the system component connections. Figure 5: System Configuration LAN Switch Ethernet Cable Power Injector AC Power External Antenna Indoor Outdoor AP Unit Ethernet Cable Ground Wire 17 Chapter 2 | Installation Overview AP Installation Tasks AP Installation Tasks Follow these tasks to install the AP in your network. For full details on each task, go to the relevant chapter or section by clicking on the link. Task 1 Unpack package and check contents Unpack your AP and check the package contents to be sure you have received all the items. Before installing your AP, be sure to review all the safety statements and guidelines in the Regulatory and Safety Information document. Task 2 Mount the AP After planning your installation, mount the unit on a pole, mast, or tower using the mounting bracket. Also install the external antennas required for your wireless service. Go to the chapter AP Chassis Figure 6: Installing the AP on a Pole 3 2 1 1 2 3 Attach one part of the bracket to the AP. Attach the other parts of the bracket to the pole. Link the two bracket parts together to secure the AP to the pole. 18 Chapter 2 | Installation Overview AP Installation Tasks Task 3 Connect Cables Connect an Ethernet cable and a grounding wire to the unit. Use outdoor-rated straight-through Ethernet cable to connect to the RJ-45 port for your network connection. Go to the chapter Network Connections For details on connecting a ground wire:
Go to the section How to Ground the Unit Figure 7: Making a Connection to the RJ-45 Port 1 2 1 2 Connect outdoor-rated Category 5e or better cable to the RJ-45 port. Be sure to use the waterproof cover on the port. Task 4 Install the PoE Power Injector and Power On Install the PoE power injector indoors. Connect the power injector to the Ethernet cable, a local LAN switch, and an AC power source. Note that the AP can also be powered by connecting directly to a IEEE 802.3at PoE switch. Go to the chapter Power and Grounding 19 Chapter 2 | Installation Overview AP Installation Tasks Figure 8: Connecting AC Power 1 2 3 1 2 3 Connect the AC power cord to a nearby AC power source. Connect Ethernet cable from the DATA IN port to a LAN switch. Connect straight-through Ethernet cable from the AP to the DATA & POWER OUT port. Task 5 Verify AP Operation Verify basic AP operation by checking the system LEDs. When operating normally the Pwr/Sys LED should be on green, the Ethernet LED on/blinking orange, and the wireless interface LEDs on/blinking orange. Go to the section Understanding the System Status LEDs Figure 9: System LEDs 1 1 System Status LEDs. 20 Chapter 2 | Installation Overview AP Installation Tasks Task 6 Make Initial Configuration Changes At this point you may need to make a few basic configuration changes to the AP so that it is compatible with your network. It is suggested to connect to the AP console port to perform this task. Go to How to Connect to the Console Port Figure 10: Console Port 1 1 Console Port. For information on AP configuration:
Refer to the Management Guide. 21 Chapter 2 | Installation Overview AP Installation Tasks 22 3 AP Chassis The AP includes its own bracket kit for mounting the unit to a 1.5 to 6 inch diameter pole or part of a radio mast or tower structure. Before continuing with AP installation, first review the general guidelines and requirements in this chapter. This chapter includes these sections:
General Installation Guidelines on page 23 How to Mount the Unit on page 25 How to Connect External Antennas on page 27 How to Align Antennas on page 28 General Installation Guidelines Be sure to follow the guidelines below when choosing a location. Caution: The planning and installation of the AP requires professional personnel that are trained in the installation of radio transmitting equipment. The user is responsible for compliance with local regulations concerning items such as antenna power, use of lightning arrestors, grounding, and radio mast or tower construction. Therefore, it is recommended to consult a professional contractor knowledgeable in local radio regulations prior to equipment installation. Antenna Position When planning a location for the AP, consider these guidelines:
When installing for an access point service, be sure to place the unit and external antennas in a location that can cover the intended service area. Be sure there are no other radio antennas within 2 m (6 ft) of the AP. Place the AP away from power and telephone lines. Avoid placing the AP too close to any metallic surfaces, such as roof-installed air-conditioning equipment, tinted windows, wire fences, or water pipes. 23 Chapter 3 | AP Chassis General Installation Guidelines Ethernet Cabling From the intended AP location, plan a cable route from the unit outdoors to the power injector module indoors. Consider these guidelines:
The total Ethernet cable length should never be longer than 100 m (328 ft). Determine a building entry point for the cable. Determine if conduits, bracing, or other structures are required for safety or protection of the cable. For lightning protection at the power injector end of the cable, consider using a lightning arrestor immediately before the cable enters the building. Radio Interference The avoidance of radio interference is an important part of wireless network planning. Interference is caused by other radio transmissions using the same or an adjacent channel frequency. You should first scan your proposed site using a spectrum analyzer to determine if there are any strong radio signals using the 802.11a/b/g/n channel frequencies. Always use a channel frequency that is furthest away from another signal. Weather Conditions When planning outdoor networks, you must take into account any extreme weather conditions that are known to affect your location. Consider these factors:
Temperature The AP is tested for normal operation in temperatures from
-10 C to 60 C. Operating in temperatures outside of this range may cause the unit to fail. Wind Velocity The AP can operate in winds up to 44 m/s and survive higher wind speeds up to 66 m/s. You must consider the known maximum wind velocity and direction at the site and be sure that any supporting structure, such as a pole, mast, or tower, is built to withstand this force. Lightning The AP includes its own built-in lightning protection. However, you should make sure that the unit, any supporting structure, and cables are all properly grounded. Additional protection using lightning rods, lightning arrestors, or surge suppressors may also be employed. Rain The AP is weatherproofed against rain. Also, prolonged heavy rain has no significant effect on the radio signal. However, it is recommended to apply weatherproof sealing tape around all connectors for extra protection. Snow and Ice Falling snow, like rain, has no significant effect on the radio signal. However, a build up of snow or ice on antennas may cause links to fail. In this case, the snow or ice has to be cleared from the antennas to restore operation of the unit. 24 Chapter 3 | AP Chassis How to Mount the Unit How to Mount the Unit The AP can be mounted in the following ways using the included mounting bracket:
To a 1.5 to 6 inch diameter pole The APs mounting bracket has two main parts. One part that can be secured to a pole using two steel-band clamps, and another part that attaches directly to the AP. The two parts link together and allow the tilt angle of the unit to be adjusted for antenna alignment. How to Pole Mount Perform the following steps to mount the unit to a 1.5 to 6 inch diameter pole or tube using the mounting bracket:
1. Using the two included steel-band clamps, thread them through the slats provided in the pole-mount part of the bracket. 2. Place the pole-mount part of the bracket against the pole and tighten the steel-
band clamps until it is secure. Figure 11: Attach Bracket to Pole 1 2 3 1 2 Pole Mount Bracket Part 3 Securing Screws, Nut and Bolt Steel-Band Clamps 3. Attach the square mounting plate to the AP with the supplied screws. 25 Chapter 3 | AP Chassis How to Mount the Unit Figure 12: Attach Bracket to AP 1 2 3 1 2 Bracket Mount Points 3 Supplied Bracket Mount Screws Square Mounting Bracket Part 4. Attach the AP with its mounting plate to the bracket already fixed to the pole. 5. Use the included long bolt to secure the AP to the pole bracket. Note that the AP tilt angle may need to be adjusted for antenna alignment. Figure 13: Mount the AP on the Pole 1 2 1 Long Steel Bolt 2 Tilt Angle Securing Screws (Four) 26 Chapter 3 | AP Chassis How to Connect External Antennas 6. Secure the AP at the required tilt angle using the two screws provided in the mounting kit. How to Connect External Antennas When deploying an AP, you need to mount external antennas and connect them to the unit. Two antennas are required for 2.4 GHz operation and two can be used for 5 GHz operation. These antennas are not included in the AP package. The SMC2891W-AN unit includes an integrated high-gain antenna for 5 GHz operation. External antennas are not required for 5 GHz operation only for 2.4 GHz operation. Some omnidirectional external antennas attach directly to the N-type connectors on the unit. Other antennas may include their own mounting brackets and connect to the unit using RF coaxial cables. Perform these steps:
1. For external antennas with mounting brackets, mount the antennas to the same supporting structure as the AP, within 3 m (10 ft) distance, using the brackets supplied in the antenna package. 2. Connect the antennas either directly to the APs N-type connectors, or use RF coaxial cable provided in the antenna package. Figure 14: Connect External Antennas 1 2 1 Direct-Attach Omnidirectional External Antennas 2 N-Type External Antenna Connectors 27 Chapter 3 | AP Chassis How to Align Antennas 3. Apply weatherproofing tape to the antenna connectors to help prevent water entering the connectors. Note: Be sure to take account of the antenna polarization direction; all antennas in a link must be mounted with the same polarization. How to Align Antennas When using the SMC2891W-AN unit with its 5 GHz integrated high-gain antenna, you will need to accurately align the antenna with another unit in the network to ensure optimum performance. Proper antenna alignment is particularly important for long-range point-to-point links. Point-to-Point Configurations In a point-to-point configuration the alignment process requires two people at each end of the link. The use of cell phones or two-way radio communication may help with coordination. To start, you can just point the antennas at each other, using binoculars or a compass to set the general direction. Then you can adjust the horizontal and vertical position to find the position where the signal is strongest and secure the unit in that position. Point-to-Multipoint Configurations In a point-to-multipoint configuration all SMC2891W-AN units must be aligned with a central SMC2890W-AN unit that may be using external omnidirectional or sector antennas. The alignment process is the same as in point-to-point links, but only the SMC2891W-AN units require the adjustment for proper alignment. To start, you can just point the SMC2891W-AN antenna at the central SMC2890W-AN unit, using binoculars or a compass to set the general direction. Then you can adjust the horizontal and vertical position to find the position where the signal is strongest and secure the unit in that position. Note: The receive signal strength of the radio signal on the local and remote unit can be viewed using the CLI or web management interfces. Refer the Management Guide for further information. 28 4 Power and Grounding This chapter focuses on how to power-on the AP. The AP can be powered using the included PoE Power Injector or by a direct connection to a PoE LAN switch. Connecting the AP to ground is also covered. This chapter includes these sections:
Power Injector Module on page 29 How to Ground the Unit on page 31 How to Install the Power Injector on page 32 Power Injector Module The AP receives power through its network cable connection using power-over-
Ethernet technology. A power injector module is included in the AP package and provides two RJ-45 Ethernet ports, one for connecting to the AP (DATA & POWER OUT), and the other for connecting to a local LAN switch (DATA IN). The DATA IN port uses an MDI (that is, internal straight-through) pin configuration. You can therefore use straight-through twisted-pair cable to connect this port to most network interconnection devices such as a switch or router that provide MDI-
X ports. However, when connecting the access point to a workstation or other device that does not have MDI-X ports, you must use crossover twisted-pair cable. Figure 15: PoE Power Injector 4 3 1 2 1 2 Ethernet from Local Network Ethernet and Power to AP 3 4 LED Indicator AC Power Socket (Hidden) 29 Chapter 4 | Power and Grounding Power Injector Module Table 2: Power Injector Module Specifications Item AC Input DC Output Output Power DATA IN Port DATA & POWER OUT Port Temperature Humidity Size Description 100~240 VAC, 50/60 Hz, 0.5 A 48 VDC, 0.35 A 16.8 W maximum 10/100/1000BASE-T, RJ-45 socket 10/100/1000BASE-T, RJ-45 socket 50 VDC on wire pairs 4, 5 (+) and 7, 8 (-) Operating: 0 - 40 C (32 - 104 F) Storage: -20 - 70 C (-4 - 158 F) Operating: 10 - 90% non-condensing Storage: 10 - 90% non-condensing W x L x H: 50 x 140 x 35 mm (4.2 x 9.0 x 1.6 inches) The AP does not have a power switch. It is powered on when its Ethernet port is connected to the power injector module, and the power injector module is connected to an AC power source. The power injector includes one LED indicator that turns on when AC power is applied. Table 3: Power Injector Module Status LED LED Status On Yellow On Green Indication Module is receiving power. The module is connected to the AP and supplying power. Blinking Green Module has detected an overload state or short-circuit condition. The power injector module automatically adjusts to any AC voltage between 100-
240 volts at 50 or 60 Hz. No voltage range settings are required. Caution: The power injector module is designed for indoor use only. Never mount the power injector outside with the AP unit. 30 Chapter 4 | Power and Grounding How to Ground the Unit How to Ground the Unit When connecting a ground wire to the AP, use the grounding screw on the unit. Be sure to use #14 AWG or larger copper core ground wire. Caution: Be sure that grounding is available and that it meets local and national electrical codes. Grounding the AP must be performed by a professional installer. The ground wire can be connected to a point on the bracket, pole, metal grounding plate, or directly to an earth termination. Make sure that there is a good electrical connection between the ground wire and the grounding point (no paint or isolating surface treatment). To connect a grounding wire to the AP, follow these steps:
1. Crimp a ring lug onto the end of the ground wire before connecting it to the unit. 2. Place the ground wire lug on one of the grounding points and firmly tighten the screw. Figure 16: Ground Wire Connection 1 2 1 AP Ground Point 2 Grounding Wire 3. Connect the other end of the grounding wire to a good ground (earth) connection. 31 Chapter 4 | Power and Grounding How to Install the Power Injector Note: Use cable strips to secure all cables to the pole. How to Install the Power Injector The power injector can be installed indoors on any horizontal surface, such as a desktop or shelf, or on a wall. Caution: Do not install the power injector outdoors. The unit is for indoor installation only. Caution: Install lightning protection at the power injector end of the Ethernet cable, use a lightning arrestor immediately before the cable enters the building. Figure 17: Connecting the Power Injector 1 2 3 1 2 AC Power Cord DATA IN Port 3 DATA & POWER OUT Port 1. Connect outdoor-rated Ethernet cable from the AP to the RJ-45 port labeled DATA & POWER OUT on the power injector. 2. Connect a straight-through unshielded twisted-pair (UTP) cable from a local LAN switch to the RJ-45 port labeled DATA IN on the power injector. Use Category 5e or better UTP cable for 10/100/1000BASE-T connections. 32 Chapter 4 | Power and Grounding How to Install the Power Injector 3. Insert the power cable plug into the standard AC socket on the power injector and the other end into a grounded, 3-pin socket, AC power source. Note: For International use, you may need to change the AC line cord. You must use a line cord set that has been approved for the socket type in your country. 4. Check the LED on top of the power injector to be sure that power is being supplied to the power injector. 33 Chapter 4 | Power and Grounding How to Install the Power Injector 34 5 Network Connections This chapter focuses on making connections to the APs network interfaces and details on network cable specifications. The AP features one 1000BASE-T RJ-45 port as well as wireless interfaces. The sections that follow describe the network interfaces. This chapter includes these sections:
Understanding the Network Status LEDs on page 36 How to Connect to Radio Interfaces on page 36 How to Connect to the RJ-45 Port on page 37 35 Chapter 5 | Network Connections Understanding the Network Status LEDs Understanding the Network Status LEDs The AP includes LED indicators to indicate network link status and activity. The LEDs are shown below and are described in the following table. Figure 18: Network Status LEDs 1 2 3 1 2 5 GHz Link/Activity LED 2.4 GHz Link/Activity LED 3 LAN Link/Activity LED Figure 19: Network Status LEDs LED Ethernet Condition On Orange Status Port has a valid link. Blinking Orange Indicates activity on the port. Off The link is down. 2.4G On Orange The 802.11b/g/n 2.4 GHz radio is enabled. Blinking Orange Indicates network activity. Off The 2.4 GHz radio is disabled. 5G On Orange The 802.11a/n 5 GHz radio is enabled. Blinking Orange Indicates network activity. Off The 5 GHz radio is disabled. How to Connect to Radio Interfaces The 802.11a standard operates in the 5 GHz Unlicensed National Information Infrastructure (UNII) band, and the 802.11b/g standard in the 2.4 GHz band. The 802.11n standard operates in both the 2.4 GHz and 5 GHz bands. Once the AP is installed and powered on, wireless clients can connect to the 802.11b/g/n radio interface using the 2.4 GHz band, or to the 802.11a/n radio using the 5 GHz band. The radio and authentication settings for wireless clients can be configured through management interfaces. For more information, refer to the Management Guide. 36 Chapter 5 | Network Connections How to Connect to the RJ-45 Port How to Connect to the RJ-45 Port The connection between the APs RJ-45 port and the PoE power injector requires outdoor-rated Category 5E or better Ethernet cable with RJ-45 plugs on each end. The length of the Ethernet cable should be less than 100 meters (328 ft). Copper Cabling Guidelines Before connecting the Ethernet copper cable, first plan a cable route from the AP outdoors to the PoE power injector indoors. Consider these guidelines:
Make sure the cable distance does not exceed 100 meters (328 ft). Determine a building entry point for the cable. Determine if conduits, bracing, or other structures are required for safety or protection of the cable. Be sure to ground the outdoor-rated Ethernet cable immediately before it enters the building. See Grounding the Ethernet Cable on page 41. For additional lightning protection, it is recommended to use a lightning arrestor immediately before the Ethernet cable enters the building. 10/100BASE-TX Pin Assignments Most 100BASE-TX RJ-45 ports support automatic MDI/MDI-X operation, so you can use straight-through or crossover cables for all network connections to PCs, switches, or hubs. In straight-through cable, pins 1, 2, 3, and 6, at one end of the cable, are connected straight through to pins 1, 2, 3, and 6 at the other end of the cable. Figure 20: RJ-45 Connector 1 1 RJ-45 Pin Numbers 37 Chapter 5 | Network Connections How to Connect to the RJ-45 Port Table 4: 10/100BASE-TX MDI and MDI-X Port Pinouts Pin MDI Signal Namea 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Transmit Data plus (TD+)
-52V power (Negative Vport) Transmit Data minus (TD-)
-52V power (Negative Vport) Receive Data plus (RD+) GND (Positive Vport)
-52V power (Negative Vport)
-52V power (Negative Vport) Receive Data minus (RD-) GND (Positive Vport) GND (Positive Vport) GND (Positive Vport) MDI-X Signal Name Receive Data plus (RD+) GND (Positive Vport) Receive Data minus (RD-) GND (Positive Vport) Transmit Data plus (TD+)
-52V power (Negative Vport) GND (Positive Vport) GND (Positive Vport) Transmit Data minus (TD-)
-52V power (Negative Vport)
-52V power (Negative Vport)
-52V power (Negative Vport) a. The + and - signs represent the polarity of the wires that make up each wire pair. 1000BASE-T Pin Assignments All 1000BASE-T ports support automatic MDI/MDI-X operation, so you can use straight-through cables for all network connections to PCs or servers, switches or hubs. The table below shows the 1000BASE-T MDI and MDI-X port pinouts. These ports require that all four pairs of wires be connected. Note that for 1000BASE-T operation, all four pairs of wires are used for both transmit and receive. 38 Chapter 5 | Network Connections How to Connect to the RJ-45 Port Table 5: 1000BASE-T MDI and MDI-X Port Pinouts Pin MDI Signal Name MDI-X Signal Name 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Bi-directional Pair A Plus (BI_DA+)
-52V power (Negative Vport) Bi-directional Pair B Plus (BI_DB+) GND (Positive Vport) Bi-directional Pair A Minus (BI_DA-)
-52V power (Negative Vport) Bi-directional Pair B Minus (BI_DB-) GND (Positive Vport) Bi-directional Pair B Plus (BI_DB+) GND (Positive Vport) Bi-directional Pair C Plus (BI_DC+)
-52V power (Negative Vport) Bi-directional Pair C Minus (BI_DC-)
-52V power (Negative Vport) Bi-directional Pair B Minus (BI_DB-) GND (Positive Vport) Bi-directional Pair D Plus (BI_DD+) GND (Positive Vport) Bi-directional Pair A Plus (BI_DA+)
-52V power (Negative Vport) Bi-directional Pair D Plus (BI_DD+) GND (Positive Vport) Bi-directional Pair D Minus (BI_DD-) GND (Positive Vport) Bi-directional Pair A Minus (BI_DA-)
-52V power (Negative Vport) Bi-directional Pair C Plus (BI_DC+)
-52V power (Negative Vport) Bi-directional Pair D Minus (BI_DD-) GND (Positive Vport) Bi-directional Pair C Minus (BI_DC-)
-52V power (Negative Vport) 1000BASE-T Cable Requirements All Category 5 UTP cables that are used for 100BASE-TX connections should also work for 1000BASE-T, providing that all four wire pairs are connected. However, it is recommended that for all critical connections, or any new cable installations, Category 5e (enhanced Category 5) or Category 6 cable should be used. The Category 5e and 6 specifications include test parameters that are only recommendations for Category 5. Therefore, the first step in preparing existing Category 5 cabling for running 1000BASE-T is a simple test of the cable installation to be sure that it complies with the IEEE 802.3-2008 standards. Connection Procedure Follow these steps to connect Ethernet copper cable to the APs RJ-45 twisted-pair copper port:
Note: Connecting the Ethernet cable to the AP powers on the unit. 1. Disassemble the waterproof port cover into its five parts:; the outer screw-on cover, the screw-on cable clamp, the inner plastic RJ-45 plug cover, the inner rubber cable seal, and the rubber port seal. 39 Chapter 5 | Network Connections How to Connect to the RJ-45 Port Figure 21: Waterproof RJ-45 Port Cover 1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 Rubber RJ-45 Port Seal Inner Plastic RJ-45 Plug Cover Inner Rubber Cable Seal 4 5 Outer Screw-on Cover Screw-on Cable Clamp 2. Peal-off the adhesive backing on the rubber RJ-45 port seal and stick it on the end of the plastic RJ-45 plug cover. 3. Cut the Ethernet cable to the required length, and then feed the cable end through the RJ-45 port waterproof cover parts in this order:
Screw-on cable clamp Outer screw-on cover Inner rubber cable seal Inner plastic RJ-45 plug cover (with rubber seal attached) 4. Crimp a new RJ-45 connector (not supplied) on the end of the Ethernet cable. 5. Push the inner rubber cable seal into the clamp end of the plastic RJ-45 plug cover. 6. Connect the RJ-45 plug to the APs RJ-45 port. 7. Push the inner plastic RJ-45 plug cover over the RJ-45 plug, and then secure it to the AP using the outer screw-on cover. Tighten the outer screw-on cover to ensure protection against moisture. 8. Screw the inner rubber cable seal onto the inner plastic RJ-45 plug cover. Tighten the seal to ensure protection against moisture. 40 Chapter 5 | Network Connections How to Connect to the RJ-45 Port Figure 22: Making a Connection to the RJ-45 Port 1 2 1 RJ-45 Plug on Ethernet Cable 2 Waterproof RJ-45 Port Cover Assembly 9. Seal the PoE port connector using tar seal or weatherproof tape for extra protection against rain and moisture. 10. Route the Ethernet cable from the AP to the power injector (or PoE LAN switch) following your cable plan and connect it to the DATA & POWER OUT port. The Power LED on the AP should turn on to indicate a valid link. Grounding the Ethernet Cable To comply with safety regulations, the shield of the outdoor-rated Ethernet cable must be connected to protective ground (earth). The grounding point can be either inside the building, or immediately at the entry point to the building, depending on where a protective ground is available. Caution: Grounding the outdoor-rated Ethernet cable must be performed by a professional installer in conformance with local safety regulations. This document proposes one method for grounding the outdoor-rated Ethernet cable through its drain wire. The actual connection method employed is left to the professional installer. To ground the outdoor-rated Ethernet cable, follow these steps:
1. Strip back about a one inch (2.4 cm) section of the Ethernet cable jacket to expose the drain wire. 41 Chapter 5 | Network Connections How to Connect to the RJ-45 Port Figure 23: Outdoor-Rated Ethernet Cable Drain Wire 1 1 Drain Wire 2. Attach a grounding cable to the drain wire and then connect it to protective earth. 3. Use weatherproof tape to cover and seal the attachment area on the Ethernet cable. 42 6 AP Management The AP includes a management agent that allows you to configure or monitor the AP using its embedded management software. To manage the AP, you can make a direct connection to the console port (out-of-band), or you can manage it through a network connection (in-band) using Telnet, Secure Shell (SSH), a web browser, or SNMP-based network management software. For a detailed description of the APs software features, refer to the Management Guide. This chapter includes these sections:
Understanding the System Status LEDs on page 44 How to Connect to the Console Port on page 45 43 Chapter 6 | AP Management Understanding the System Status LEDs Understanding the System Status LEDs The AP includes LED indicators that indicate system and port status. The LEDs are shown below and are described in the following table. Figure 24: System Status LEDs 1 2 3 4 1 2 5 GHz Link/Activity LED 2.4 GHz Link/Activity LED 3 4 LAN Link/Activity LED Power/System LED Figure 25: System Status LEDs LED Power Condition On Green Status The system power is on. Blinking Green The system is currently booting up. Off System is off (no power). LAN On Orange Port has a valid link. Blinking Orange Indicates activity on the port. Off The link is down. 2.4G On Orange The 802.11b/g/n 2.4 GHz radio is enabled. Blinking Orange Indicates network activity. Off The 2.4 GHz radio is disabled. 5G On Orange The 802.11a/n 5 GHz radio is enabled. Blinking Orange Indicates network activity. Off The 5 GHz radio is disabled. 44 Chapter 6 | AP Management How to Connect to the Console Port How to Connect to the Console Port The RJ-45 Console port on the AP is used to connect to the AP for out-of-band console configuration. The console device can be a PC or workstation running a VT-
100 terminal emulator, or a VT-100 terminal. An RJ-45-to-DB-9 cable is supplied with the AP for connecting to a PCs RS-232 serial DB-9 DTE (COM) port. Note: To connect to notebooks or other PCs that do not have a DB-9 COM port, use a USB to male DB-9 adapter cable (not included with the AP). The following table describes the pin assignments used in the RJ-45-to-DB-9 console cable. Table 6: Console Cable Wiring APs 8-Pin Console Port Null Modem PCs 9-Pin DTE Port 1 RXD (receive data)
3 TXD (transmit data) 3 TXD (transmit data)
2 RXD (receive data) 4 SGND (signal ground)
5 SGND (signal ground) No other pins are used. The serial ports configuration requirements are as follows:
Default Baud rate115,200 bps Character Size8 Characters ParityNone Stop bitOne Data bits8 Flow controlnone 45 Chapter 6 | AP Management How to Connect to the Console Port Figure 26: Console Port Connection 1 2 3 1 2 RJ-45 Console Port Waterproof Port Cover 3 Console Cable Follow these steps to connect to the Console port:
1. Unscrew the waterproof protective cap on the APs Console port. 2. Attach the DB-9 end of the included serial cable to a DB-9 COM port connector on a management PC. Use a USB to male DB-9 adapter cable (not included) if needed. 3. Attach the RJ-45 end of the serial cable to the Console port on the AP. 4. Configure the PCs COM port required settings using VT-100 terminal emulator software (such as HyperTerminal) running on the management PC. 5. Log in to the command-line interface (CLI) using default settings:
User admin Password null (there is no default password) 6. When you have completed your console session, remove the console cable and replace the waterproof cap on the connector. For a detailed description of connecting to the console and using the APs command line interface (CLI), refer to the Management Guide. 46 A Troubleshooting Diagnosing LED Indicators Table 7: Troubleshooting Chart Symptom Power LED is Off LAN LED is Off Action Check connections between the PoE Power Injector, the power cord and the wall outlet. Contact your dealer for assistance. Verify that the AP and attached PoE Power Injector are powered on. Be sure the cable is plugged into both the AP and PoE Power Injector. Verify that the proper cable type is used and its length does not exceed specified limits. Check the cable connections for possible defects. Replace the defective cable if necessary. System Self-Diagnostic Test Failure If there is a failure of the system power-on-self-test (POST), you can use a console connection to view the POST results. The POST results may indicate a failed component or help troubleshoot the problem. For more information on connecting to the console port and using the CLI, refer to the Management Guide. Note a POST failure normally indicates a serious hardware fault that cannot be rectified or worked around. If you encounter a POST failure, you should contact your dealer for assistance. Power Problems If the power indicator does not turn on when the Ethernet cable is plugged in, you may have a problem with the power outlet, power cord, or PoE power injector. However, if the unit powers off after running for a while, check for loose power connections, power losses or surges at the power outlet. If you still cannot isolate the problem, the PoE power injector may be defective. 47 Chapter A | Troubleshooting Installation Installation Verify that all system components have been properly installed. If one or more components appear to be malfunctioning (such as the power cord or network cabling), test them in an alternate environment where you are sure that all the other components are functioning properly. Wireless Connection Problems In-Band Access If wireless clients cannot access the network, check the following items before you contact your local dealer for assistance:
Be sure the AP and wireless clients are configured with the same Service Set ID
(SSID). Ensure that wireless clients are properly configured with the appropriate authentication or encryption keys. If authentication is being performed through a RADIUS server, ensure that the clients are properly configured on the RADIUS server. If authentication is being performed through IEEE 802.1X, be sure the wireless users have installed and properly configured 802.1X client software. If the AP cannot be configured using Telnet, a web browser, or SNMP software:
Be sure to have configured the AP with a valid IP address, subnet mask and default gateway. Check that you have a valid network connection to the AP and that the Ethernet port or the wireless interface that you are using has not been disabled. If you are connecting to the AP through the wired Ethernet interface, check the network cabling between the management station and the AP. If you are connecting to the AP from a wireless client, ensure that you have a valid connection to the AP. If you cannot connect using Telnet, you may have exceeded the maximum number of concurrent Telnet sessions permitted. Try connecting again at a later time. 48 Chapter A | Troubleshooting Out-of-Band Access Out-of-Band Access If you cannot access the on-board configuration program via a serial port connection:
Be sure you have set the terminal emulator program to VT100 compatible, 8 data bits, 1 stop bit, no parity and 115200 Baud Rate. Check that the null-modem serial cable conforms to the pin-out connections provided in How to Connect to the Console Port on page 45. Reset the Access Point If all other recovery measure fail, and the AP is still not functioning properly, take any of these steps to reset the APs hardware:
Enter the reload command from the console interface. Restart the AP from the web interface. Perform a power reset. 49 Index Numerics 10/100 pin assignments 37 1000BASE-T pin assignments 38 A AC power connection 33 antenna position 23 antennas, external 13 B basic installation tasks 18 baud rate, console 45 bracket kit 14 C cable grounding 41 cabling guidelines 24 chassis grounding 12, 13 connection of system 17 console port 12 console port, pin assignments 45 contents of package 16 copper cable connection 37 cover, weatherproof 40 D diagnosing LED indicators 47 diagnostic test failure 47 E environmental specifications 15 equipment checklist 16 Ethernet RJ-45 port 12 external antennas 13 external antennas, mounting 27 G ground points 12, 13 grounding Ethernet cable 41 grounding the AP 31 H hardware errors 47 hardware overview 11 hardware specifications 15 humidity specifications 15 I in-band access 48 indicators, LED 36, 44 injector module 14 installation tasks 18 installation troubleshooting 48 interference, radio 24 introduction 16 K key components 12 L LED indicators port 36, 44 Power 44 link status LEDs 36 location guidelines 23 M management out-of-band 43 web-based 43 MDI, RJ-45 pin configuration 29 mounting the AP 25 O operating temperature 15 outdoor planning 24 outdoor-rated cable grounding 41 out-of-band access 49 out-of-band management 43 overview of hardware 11 50 Index P package contents 16 pin assignments console port 45 RJ-45 port 37 planning guidelines 23 PoE injector module 29 PoE port 12 pole mount bracket 14 pole mounting 25 port cover, weatherproof 40 port LEDs 36 position of AP 23 POST failure 47 power injector 14, 29 power LED 44 power problems 47 product overview 11 R radio interfaces, connecting 36 radio interference 24 reset.AP 49 RJ-45 connection 37 RJ-45 port 12 routing cables 24 S serial port 12 site selection 23 specifications, key 15 status LEDs 36, 44 system connections 17 system LEDs 13, 44 T tasks, installation 18 technical specifications 15 temperature specifications 15 test point 13 troubleshooting LEDs 47 W wall mount bracket 14 water-tight test point 13 weather conditions 24 weatherproof port cover 40 web-based management 43 wind velocity, operational 15 wireless problems 48 51 Index 52 Headquarters No. 1, Creation Rd. III Hsinchu Science Park Taiwan 30077 Tel: +886 3 5638888 Fax: +886 3 6686111
(for Asia-Pacific): Technical Support information at www.smc-asia.com www.smcnetworks.co.kr SMC2890W-AN, SMC2891W-AN www.smc.com
1 2 | User Manual - MG | Users Manual | 2.23 MiB |
MANAGEMENT GUIDE 802.11a/b/g/n Outdoor Dual-Band Wireless Access Point SMC2890W-AN, SMC2891W-AN Outdoor Access Point Management Guide No. 1, Creation Road III, Hsinchu Science Park, 30077, Taiwan, R.O.C. Tel: +886 3 5638888 Fax: +886 3 6686111 January 2013 Pub. # 149100000208A E012013-CS-R01 Information furnished by SMC Networks, Inc. (SMC) is believed to be accurate and reliable. However, no responsibility is assumed by SMC for its use, nor for any infringements of patents or other rights of third parties which may result from its use. No license is granted by implication or otherwise under any patent or patent rights of SMC. SMC reserves the right to change specifications at any time without notice. Copyright 2013 by SMC Networks, Inc. No. 1 Creation Road III, Hsinchu Science Park, 30077, Taiwan, R.O.C. All rights reserved Trademarks:
SMC is a registered trademark; and Barricade, EZ Switch, TigerStack, TigerSwitch, and TigerAccess are trademarks of SMC Networks, Inc. Other product and company names are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective holders. Warranty and Product Registration To register SMC products and to review the detailed warranty statement, please refer to the Support Section of the SMC Website at http://www.smc.com. 4 How to Use This Guide This guide includes detailed information on the access point (AP) software, including how to operate and use the management functions of the AP. To deploy this AP effectively and ensure trouble-free operation, you should first read the relevant sections in this guide so that you are familiar with all its software features. Who Should Read This Guide?
This guide is for network administrators who are responsible for operating and maintaining network equipment. The guide assumes a basic working knowledge of LANs (Local Area Networks), the Internet Protocol (IP), and Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP). How This Guide is Organized The organization of this guide is based on the APs main management interfaces. The web management interface and command line interface (CLI) are described in separate sections. An introduction and initial configuration information is also provided. The guide includes these sections:
Section I Getting Started Includes an introduction to AP management and initial configuration settings. Section II Web Configuration Includes all management options available through the web interface. Section III Command Line Interface Includes information on how to use the CLI and details on all CLI commands. Section IV Appendices Includes information on troubleshooting AP management access. Related Documentation This guide focuses on AP software configuration, it does not cover hardware installation of the AP. For specific information on how to install the AP, see the following guide:
Installation Guide For all safety information and regulatory statements, see the following documents:
Quick Start Guide Safety and Regulatory Information 5 How to Use This Guide Conventions The following conventions are used throughout this guide to show information:
Note: Emphasizes important information or calls your attention to related features or instructions. Caution: Alerts you to a potential hazard that could cause loss of data, or damage the system or equipment. Warning: Alerts you to a potential hazard that could cause personal injury. Revision History This section summarizes the changes in each revision of this guide. January 2013 Revision This is the first revision of this guide. It is valid for software release v0.3.3.4. 6 Contents Warranty and Product Registration How to Use This Guide Contents Figures Tables Section I Getting Started 1 Introduction Configuration Options Console Port Connection Console Login Network Connections Connecting to the Web Interface Home Page and Main Menu Common Web Page Buttons 2 Initial Configuration CLI Initial Configuration Steps Setting an IP Address Setting a Password Setting the Country Code Web Quick Start Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 7 4 5 7 12 14 17 18 18 19 19 20 20 21 22 24 24 24 25 25 26 26 28 29 31 Contents Section II Web Configuration 3 System Settings Administration Settings IPv4 Address IPv6 Address RADIUS Settings Primary and Secondary RADIUS Server Setup RADIUS Accounting System Time SNTP Server Settings Time Zone Setting Daylight Saving Settings VLAN Configuration System Logs Quick Start Wizard System Resource Bridge STP Configuration Spanning Tree Protocol (STP) Bridge Configuration 4 Management Settings Remote Management Settings Access Limitation Simple Network Management Protocol SNMP Basic Settings SNMP Trap Settings View Access Control Model SNMPv3 Users SNMPv3 Targets SNMPv3 Notification Filters 5 Advanced Settings Local Bridge Filter 8 32 33 34 35 36 37 37 38 39 40 40 40 40 42 43 44 45 45 48 49 49 51 52 52 54 55 56 57 58 60 60 Link Layer Discovery Protocol Access Control Lists Source Address Settings Destination Address Settings Ethernet Type Link Integrity 6 Wireless Settings Authentication Local MAC Authentication RADIUS MAC Authentication Radio Settings Virtual Access Points (VAPs) VAP Basic Settings WDS-STA Mode Wireless Security Settings Wired Equivalent Privacy (WEP) VAP QoS Settings VAP Bandwidth Settings Rogue AP Detection Wi-Fi Multimedia (WMM) 7 Maintenance Settings Upgrading Firmware Running Configuration Resetting the Access Point Scheduled Reboot 8 Status Information AP Status AP System Configuration AP Wireless Configuration Station Status Station Statistics Event Logs WDS Status 9 Contents 61 63 63 64 65 66 67 68 68 69 71 75 76 78 78 80 82 84 84 86 91 91 93 94 95 97 98 98 100 101 102 103 104 Contents Section III Command Line Interface 9 Using the Command Line Interface Console Connection Telnet Connection Entering Commands Keywords and Arguments Minimum Abbreviation Command Completion Getting Help on Commands Showing Commands Negating the Effect of Commands Using Command History Understanding Command Modes Command Line Processing 10 General Commands 11 System Management Commands 12 System Logging Commands 13 System Clock Commands 14 DHCP Relay Commands 15 SNMP Commands 16 Flash/File Commands 17 RADIUS Client Commands 18 802.1X Authentication Commands 19 MAC Address Authentication Commands 20 Filtering Commands 21 Spanning Tree Commands 10 107 109 109 110 111 111 111 111 111 111 112 112 112 114 115 119 139 144 149 151 164 167 173 175 179 185 22 WDS Bridge Commands 23 Ethernet Interface Commands 24 Wireless Interface Commands 25 Wireless Security Commands 26 Rogue AP Detection Commands 27 Link Integrity Commands 28 Link Layer Discovery Commands 29 VLAN Commands 30 WMM Commands 31 QoS Commands Section IV Appendices A Troubleshooting Problems Accessing the Management Interface Using System Logs Index of CLI Commands Index Contents 197 199 206 232 241 247 250 254 258 263 271 272 272 272 274 276 11 Figures IPv4 Configuration IPv6 Configuration Figure 1: Login Page Figure 2: The Home Page Figure 3: Set Configuration Changes Figure 4: Help Menu Figure 5: Quick Start - Step 1 Figure 6: Quick Start - Step 2 Figure 7: Quick Start - Step 3 Figure 8: Quick Start - Step 4 Figure 9: Administration Figure 10:
Figure 11:
Figure 12: RADIUS Settings Figure 13: SNTP Settings Figure 14: Setting the VLAN Identity Figure 15: System Log Settings Figure 16: System Resource Figure 17: Spanning Tree Protocol Figure 18: Bridge Configuration Figure 19: Remote Management Figure 20: Access Limitation Figure 21: SNMP Basic Settings Figure 22: SNMP Trap Settings Figure 23: SNMP VACM Figure 24: Configuring SNMPv3 Users Figure 25: SNMPv3 Targets Figure 26: SNMP Notification Filter Figure 27: Local Bridge Filter Figure 28: LLDP Settings Figure 29: Source ACLs 12 21 21 22 23 27 28 29 31 34 35 36 38 39 41 42 44 46 48 50 51 53 54 55 56 58 58 60 61 63 Figures 64 65 66 68 69 71 75 76 78 78 81 82 83 84 85 88 88 92 93 95 95 96 98 100 101 102 103 104 Figure 30: Destination ACLs Figure 31: Ethernet Type Filter Figure 32: Link Integrity Figure 33: Local Authentication Figure 34: RADIUS Authentication Figure 35: Radio Settings Figure 36: VAP Settings Figure 37: VAP Basic Settings Figure 38: WDS-STA Mode Figure 39: Configuring VAPs - Security Settings Figure 40: WEP Configuration Figure 41: QoS Settings Figure 42: QoS Template Setting Figure 43: Bandwidth Settings Figure 44: Rogue AP Detection Figure 45: WMM Backoff Wait Times Figure 46: QoS Figure 47: Firmware Figure 48: Running Configuration File Figure 49: Resetting the Access Point Figure 50: Reboot Schedule Fixed Time Figure 51: Reboot Schedule Countdown Time Figure 52: AP System Configuration Figure 53: AP Wireless Configuration Figure 54: Station Status Figure 55: Station Statistics Figure 56: Event Logs Figure 57: WDS Status 13 Tables Table 1: Logging Levels Table 2: WMM Access Categories Table 3: Command Modes Table 4: General Commands Table 5: System Management Commands Table 6: Country Codes Table 7: System Management Commands Table 8: Logging Levels Table 9: System Clock Commands Table 10: DHCP Relay Commands Table 11: SNMP Commands Table 12: Flash/File Commands Table 13: RADIUS Client Commands Table 14: 802.1x Authentication Table 15: MAC Address Authentication Table 16: Filtering Commands Table 17: Spanning Tree Commands Table 18: WDS Bridge Commands Table 19: Ethernet Interface Commands Table 20: Wireless Interface Commands Table 21: Wireless Security Commands Table 22: Rogue AP Detection Commands Table 23: Link Integrity Commands Table 24: Link Layer Discovery Commands Table 25: VLAN Commands Table 26: WMM Commands Table 27: AP Parameters Table 28: BSS Parameters Table 29: QoS Commands 14 43 87 113 115 119 120 139 141 144 149 151 164 167 173 175 179 185 197 199 206 232 241 247 250 254 258 260 261 263 Table 30: Troubleshooting Chart Tables 272 15 Tables 16 Section I Getting Started This section provides an overview of the access point, and introduces some basic concepts about wireless networking. It also describes the basic settings required to access the management interface. This section includes these chapters:
Introduction on page 18 Initial Configuration on page 24 17 1 Introduction The access point (AP) runs software that includes a network management agent. The agent offers a variety of management options, including SNMP and a web-
based interface. A PC may also be connected directly to the APs console port for configuration using a command line interface (CLI). Configuration Options The APs HTTP web agent allows you to configure AP parameters, monitor wireless connections, and display statistics using a standard web browser such as Internet Explorer 6.x or above, and Mozilla Firefox 3.6.2/4/5. The APs web management interface can be accessed from any computer attached to the network. The CLI program can be accessed by a direct connection to the RS-232 serial console port on the AP, or remotely by a Telnet or Secure Shell (SSH) connection over the network. The APs management agent also supports SNMP (Simple Network Management Protocol). This SNMP agent permits the AP to be managed from any computer in the network using network management software. The APs web interface, console interface, and SNMP agent allow you to perform management functions such as:
Set management access user names and passwords Configure IP settings Configure SNMP parameters Configure 2.4 GHz and 5 GHz radio settings Control access through wireless security settings Filter packets using Access Control Lists (ACLs) Upload and download system firmware or configuration files Display system information and statistics 18 Chapter 1 | Introduction Console Port Connection Console Port Connection The AP provides an RS-232 serial console port that enables a connection to a PC or terminal for monitoring and configuring the AP. A null-modem console cable is provided with the AP. Attach a VT100-compatible terminal, or a PC running a terminal emulation program to the AP. You can use the console cable provided with this package, or use a null-
modem cable that complies with the wiring assignments shown in the Installation Guide. To connect a terminal to the console port, complete the following steps:
1. Connect the console cable to the serial port on a terminal, or a PC running terminal emulation software, and tighten the captive retaining screws on the DB-9 connector. 2. Connect the other end of the cable to the console port on the AP. 3. Make sure the terminal emulation software is set as follows:
Select the appropriate serial port (COM port 1 or COM port 2). Set the baud rate to 115200 bps. Set the data format to 8 data bits, 1 stop bit, and no parity. Set flow control to none. Set the emulation mode to VT100. When using HyperTerminal, select Terminal keys, not Windows keys. Note: Once you have set up the terminal correctly, the console login screen will be displayed. For a description of how to use the CLI, see Using the Command Line Interface on page 109. For a list of all the CLI commands, refer to Index of CLI Commands on page 274. Console Login Access to the CLI is controlled by user names and passwords. The AP has a default user name and password. To log into the CLI using the default user name and password, perform these steps:
1. To initiate your console connection, press <Enter>. The User Access Verification procedure starts. 19 Chapter 1 | Introduction Network Connections 2. At the login prompt, enter admin. 3. At the Password prompt, press <Enter>. There is no default password. 4. The session is opened and the CLI displays the Accton# prompt indicating you have access to the CLI commands. Example
(none) login: admin Password:
Jan 1 11:33:13 login[1918]: root login on 'ttyS0'
SMC#
Network Connections Prior to accessing the APs management agent through a network connection, you must first configure it with a valid IP address, subnet mask, and default gateway using a console connection, or the DHCP protocol. The AP has a static default management IPv4 address of 192.168.1.10 and a subnet mask of 255.255.255.0. Once the APs IP settings are configured for the network, you can access the APs management agent from anywhere within the attached network. The management agent can be accessed using Telnet from any computer attached to the network. The AP can also be managed by any computer using a web browser, or from a network computer using SNMP network management software. Connecting to the Web Interface The AP offers a user-friendly web-based management interface for the configuration of all the units features. Any PC directly attached to the unit can access the management interface using a web browser, such as Internet Explorer
(version 6.x or above) or Firefox (version 2.x or above). You may want to make initial configuration changes by connecting a PC directly to the APs LAN port. The AP has a default management IP address of 192.168.1.10 and a subnet mask of 255.255.255.0. You must set your PC IP address to be on the same subnet as the AP (that is, the PC and AP addresses must both start 192.168.1.x). To access the APs web management interface, follow these steps:
1. Use your web browser to connect to the management interface using the default IP address of 192.168.1.10. 20 Chapter 1 | Introduction Connecting to the Web Interface 2. Log into the interface by entering the default username admin with no password, then click Login. Note: It is strongly recommended to change the default user name and password the first time you access the web interface. For information on changing user names and passwords, See Administration Settings on page 34. Figure 1: Login Page Home Page and Main Menu After logging in to the web interface, the home page displays. The home page shows some basic settings for the AP, including Country Code and the management access password. Figure 2: The Home Page 21 Chapter 1 | Introduction Connecting to the Web Interface The web interface Main Menu menu provides access to all the configuration settings available for the AP. To configure settings, click the relevant Main Menu item. Each Main Menu item is sumarized below with links to the relevant section in this guide where configuration parameters are described in detail:
System Configures Management IP, WAN, LAN and QoS settings. See System Settings on page 33. Administration Configures HTTP, Telnet, and SSH access settings. See Management Settings on page 49. Advanced Confiures LLDP and Access Control Lists. See Advanced Settings on page 60. Wireless Configures AP radio settings. See Wireless Settings on page 67. SNMP Configures SNMP settings. See Management Settings on page 49. Maintentance Enables firmware upgrades and resets the AP. See Maintenance Settings on page 91. Information Displays current system settings. See Status Information on page 97. Common Web Page Buttons The list below describes the common buttons found on most web management pages:
Set Applies the new parameters and saves them to temporary RAM memory. Also displays a screen to inform you when it has taken affect. Clicking OK returns to the home page. The running configuration will not be saved upon a reboot unless you use the Save Config button. Figure 3: Set Configuration Changes Cancel Cancels the newly entered settings and restores the originals. Help Displays the help window. 22 Chapter 1 | Introduction Connecting to the Web Interface Figure 4: Help Menu Logout Ends the web management session. Save Config Saves the current configuration so that it is retained after a restart. 23 2 Initial Configuration The APs initial configuration steps can be made through the CLI or web browser interface. If the AP is not configured with an IP address that is compatible with your network. You can first use the command line interface (CLI) as described below to configure a valid IP address. CLI Initial Configuration Steps First connect to the APs console port and log in to the CLI, as described in Console Port Connection on page 19. Then proceed with the required configuration. Setting an IP Address If the default IP address is not compatible with your network or a DHCP server is not available, the APs IP address must be configured manually using the CLI. Type configure to enter configuration mode, then type interface ethernet to access the Ethernet interface-configuration mode. SMC#configure SMC(config)#interface ethernet SMC(config-if)#
First type no ip dhcp to disable DHCP client mode. Then type ip address ip-
address netmask gateway, where ip-address is the access points IP address, netmask is the network mask for the network, and gateway is the default gateway router. Check with your system administrator to obtain an IP address that is compatible with your network. SMC(if-ethernet)#no ip dhcp SMC(if-ethernet)#ip address 192.168.2.2 255.255.255.0 192.168.2.254 SMC(if-ethernet)#
After configuring the access points IP parameters, you can access the management interface from anywhere within the attached network. The command line interface can also be accessed using Telnet from any computer attached to the network. Note: Command examples shown later in this manual abbreviate the console prompt to AP for simplicity. 24 Chapter 2 | Initial Configuration CLI Initial Configuration Steps Setting a Password If you are logging in to the CLI for the fist time, you should define management access passwords for an administrator and guest (used for CLI and web management), record them, and then keep them in a safe place. Note: If you loose your management access passwords, you will need to use the Reset button on the AP to set the configuration back to factory default values. Passwords can consist of 5 to 32 alphanumeric characters and are case sensitive. To prevent unauthorized access to the AP, set the passwords as follows:
Open the console interface to access the CLI prompt. Type configure and press
<Enter>. Type password admin null password, where null is the default old password, and password is your new password. Press <Enter>. Example AP#configure AP(config)#password admin null tpschris AP(config)#
Setting the Country Code You must set the country code of the AP to be sure that the radios operate according to permitted local regulations. That is, setting the country code restricts operation of the AP to the radio channels and transmit power levels permitted for wireless networks in the specified country. Caution: You must set the country code to the country of operation. Setting the country code ensures that the radios operate within the local regulations specified for wireless networks. Note: The country code selection is for non-US models only and is not available to all US models. Per FCC regulation, all Wi-Fi products marketed in the US must be fixed to US operation channels only. From the CLI prompt, type country ? to display the list of country codes. Select the code for your country, and enter the command again, following by your country code (for example., tw for Taiwan). Example AP#country ?
WORD Country code:
AL-ALBANIA, DZ-ALGERIA, AR-ARGENTINA, AM-ARMENIA, AU-AUSTRALIA, AT-AUSTRIA, AZ-AZERBAIJAN, BH-BAHRAIN, BY-BELARUS, BE-BELGIUM, BZ-BELIZE, BO-BOLIVIA, 25 Chapter 2 | Initial Configuration Web Quick Start BA-BOSNIA, BR-BRAZIL, BN-BRUNEI_DARUSSALAM, BG-BULGARIA, CA-CANADA, CL-CHILE, CN-CHINA, CO-COLOMBIA, CR-COSTA_RICA, HR-CROATIA, CY-CYPRUS, CZ-CZECH_REPUBLIC, DK-DENMARK, DK-DENMARK, DO-DOMINICAN_REPUBLIC, EC-ECUADOR, EG-EGYPT, EE-ESTONIA, FI-FINLAND, FO-FAROE_ISLANDS, FR-FRANCE, F2-FRANCE2, GE-GEORGIA, DE-GERMANY, GR-GREECE, GT-GUATEMALA, HK-HONG_KONG, HN-HONDURAS, HU-HUNGARY, IS-ICELAND, IN-INDIA, ID-INDONESIA, IR-IRAN, IQ-IRAQ, IE-IRELAND, IL-ISRAEL, IT-ITALY, JM-JAMAICA, JP0-JAPAN0, JP3-JAPAN3(including 4.9G channels), JO-JORDAN, KE-KENYA, KZ-KAZAKHSTAN, KP-NORTH KOREA, KR-KOREA_REPUBLIC, K2-KOREA_REPUBLIC2(including 2.3G channels), K3-KOREA_REPUBLIC3(more channels in 5G), KW-KUWAIT, LV-LATVIA, LB-LEBANON, LI-LIECHTENSTEIN, LT-LITHUANIA, LU-LUXEMBOURG, LY-LIBYA, MO-MACAU, MO-MACAU, MK-MACEDONIA, MY-MALAYSIA, MT-MALTA, MX-MEXICO, MC-MONACO, MA-MOROCCO, NL-NETHERLANDS, AN-NETHERLANDS-ANTELLIS, NZ-NEW_ZEALAND, NI-NICARGUA, NO-NORWAY, OM-OMAN, PK-PAKISTAN, PA-PANAMA, PY-PARAGUAY, PE-PERU, PH-PHILIPPINES, PL-POLAND, PT-PORTUGAL, PR-PUERTO_RICO, QA-QATAR, RO-ROMANIA, RU-RUSSIA, SA-SAUDI_ARABIA, RS_ME-SERBIA & MONTENEGRO, SG-SINGAPORE, SI-SLOVENIA, SK-SLOVAK_REPUBLIC, SV-EL SALVADOR, ZA-SOUTH_AFRICA, ES-SPAIN, LK-SRILANKA, SE-SWEDEN, CH-SWITZERLAND, SY-SYRIA, TW-TAIWAN, TH-THAILAND, TT-TRINIDAD & TOBAGO, TN-TUNISIA, TR-TURKEY, AE-UNITED_ARAB_EMIRATES, GB-UNITED_KINGDOM, UA-UKRAINE, US-UNITED_STATES, PS-UNITED_STATES(PUBLIC SAFETY), UY-URUGUAY, UZ-UZBEKISTAN, VE-VENEZUELA, VN-VIETNAM, YE-YEMEN, ZW-ZIMBABWE AP# country tw AP#
Web Quick Start The web interface Quick Start menu is designed to help you configure the basic settings required to get the AP up and running. Click System followed by Quick Start Step 1 The first page of the Quick Start configures the system identification, access password, and the Country Code. 26 Chapter 2 | Initial Configuration Web Quick Start Figure 5: Quick Start - Step 1 The following items are displayed on the first page of the Quick Start wizard:
Identification System Name The name assigned to the access point.
(Default: SMC2890W-AN or SMC2891W-AN) Change Password Username/Guest Username The name of the user is fixed as either admin or guest and is not configurable. Old Password If the unit has been configured with a password already, enter that password, otherwise enter the default password null. New Password The password for management access.
(Length: 5-32 characters, case sensitive) Confirm New Password Enter the password again for verification. Country Code Country Code Configures the access points country code from a drop down menu, which identifies the country of operation and sets the authorized radio channels. 27 Chapter 2 | Initial Configuration Web Quick Start Caution: You must set the country code to the country of operation. Setting the country code restricts operation of the access point to the radio channels and transmit power levels permitted for wireless networks in the specified country. Cancel Cancels the newly entered settings and restores the orignals. Next Proceeds to the next page. Step 2 The Step 2 page of the Quick Start configures IP settings and DHCP client status. Figure 6: Quick Start - Step 2 The following items are displayed on this page:
DHCP DHCP Status Enables/disables DHCP on the access point. (Default: Disabled) IP Address Specifies an IP address for the access point. Valid IP addresses consist of four decimal numbers, 0 to 255, separated by periods. (Default:
192.168.2.10.) Subnet Mask Indicates the local subnet mask. Select the desired mask from the drop down menu. (Default: 255.255.255.0) Default Gateway The default gateway is the IP address of the router for the access point, which is used if the requested destination address is not on the local subnet. (Default: 192.168.2.254) If you have DNS, RADIUS, or other network servers located on another subnet, type the IP address of the default gateway router in the text field provided. 28 Chapter 2 | Initial Configuration Web Quick Start Primary and Secondary DNS Address The IP address of Domain Name Servers on the network. A DNS maps numerical IP addresses to domain names and can be used to identify network hosts by familiar names instead of the IP addresses. (The default Primary and Secondary DNS addresses are null values.) Management IP The IPv4 address of the AP through which you can access management interfaces. Management IP Address Specifies an IPv4 address for management of the access point. (Default: 192.168.1.10.) Management Subnet Mask Indicates the local subnet mask.
(Default: 255.255.255.0) Prev Returns to the previous screen. Cancel Cancels the newly entered settings and restores the orignals. Next Proceeds to the final step in the Quick Start wizard. Step 3 The Step 3 page of the Quick Start configures basic radio and wireless security settings. Figure 7: Quick Start - Step 3 The following items are displayed on this page:
Basic Setting SSID The name of the basic service set provided by the primary VAP interface. Clients that want to connect to the network through the AP must set their SSID to the same as that of a VAP interface.
(Default: EAP9112A_11BGN_0; Range: 1-32 characters) 29 Chapter 2 | Initial Configuration Web Quick Start Security Association Mode Defines the mode with which the VAP will associate with clients. (For more information on security modes, see Wireless Security Settings on page 78.) Open System: The VAP is configured by default as an open system, which broadcasts a beacon signal including the configured SSID. Wireless clients with an SSID setting of any can read the SSID from the beacon and automatically set their SSID to allow immediate connection. WPA: WPA employs a combination of several technologies to provide an enhanced security solution for 802.11 wireless networks. WPA-PSK: For enterprise deployment, WPA requires a RADIUS authentication server to be configured on the wired network. However, for small office networks that may not have the resources to configure and maintain a RADIUS server, WPA provides a simple operating mode that uses just a pre-shared password for network access. The Pre-Shared Key mode uses a common password for user authentication that is manually entered on the access point and all wireless clients. The PSK mode uses the same TKIP packet encryption and key management as WPA in the enterprise, providing a robust and manageable alternative for small networks. WPA2: WPA was introduced as an interim solution for the vulnerability of WEP pending the ratification of the IEEE 802.11i wireless security standard. In effect, the WPA security features are a subset of the 802.11i standard. WPA2 includes the now ratified 802.11i standard, but also offers backward compatibility with WPA. Therefore, WPA2 includes the same 802.1X and PSK modes of operation and support for TKIP encryption. WPA2-PSK: Clients using WPA2 with a Pre-shared Key are accepted for authentication. WPA-WPA2 Mixed: Clients using WPA or WPA2 are accepted for authentication. WPA-WPA2-PSK-mixed: Clients using WPA or WPA2 with a Pre-shared Key are accepted for authentication. Encryption Method Selects an encryption method for the global key used for multicast and broadcast traffic, which is supported by all wireless clients. WEP: WEP is used as the multicast encryption cipher. You should select WEP only when both WPA and WEP clients are supported. TKIP: TKIP is used as the multicast encryption cipher. AES-CCMP: AES-CCMP is used as the multicast encryption cipher. AES-
CCMP is the standard encryption cipher required for WPA2. 30 Chapter 2 | Initial Configuration Web Quick Start Authentication 802.1X The access point supports 802.1X authentication only for clients initiating the 802.1X authentication process (i.e., the access point does not initiate 802.1X authentication). For clients initiating 802.1X, only those successfully authenticated are allowed to access the network. For those clients not initiating 802.1X, access to the network is allowed after successful wireless association with the access point. The 802.1X mode allows access for clients not using WPA or WPA2 security. Pre-Authentication When using WPA2 over 802.1X, pre-authentication can be enabled, which allows clients to roam to a new access point and be quickly associated without performing full 802.1X authentication. (Default: Disabled) 802.1x Reauthentication Time The time period after which a connected client must be re-authenticated. During the re-authentication process of verifying the clients credentials on the RADIUS server, the client remains connected the network. Only if re-authentication fails is network access blocked. (Range: 0-65535 seconds; Default: 0 means disabled) Note: When 802.1X is enabled, be sure to configure RADIUS server details. For more information, see RADIUS Settings on page 37. Step 4 When you have clicked Set after Step 3, the AP saves the Quick Start configuration settings. Click OK to confirm that the Quick Start is complete. Figure 8: Quick Start - Step 4 31 Section II Web Configuration This section provides details on configuring the access point using the web browser interface. This section includes these chapters:
System Settings on page 33 Management Settings on page 49 Advanced Settings on page 60 Wireless Settings on page 67 Maintenance Settings on page 91 Status Information on page 97 32 3 System Settings This chapter describes basic system settings on the access point. It includes the following sections:
Administration Settings on page 34 IPv4 Address on page 35 IPv6 Address on page 36 RADIUS Settings on page 37 System Time on page 39 VLAN Configuration on page 40 System Logs on page 42 Quick Start Wizard on page 43 System Resource on page 44 Bridge STP Configuration on page 45 33 Chapter 3 | System Settings Administration Settings Administration Settings The Administration Settings page configures some basic settings for the AP, such as the system identification name, the management access passwords, and the wireless operation Country Code. Figure 9: Administration The following items are displayed on this page:
System Name An alias for the AP, enabling the device to be uniquely identified on the network. (Default: SMC2890W-AN or SMC2891W-AN;
Range: 1-32 characters) Username/Guest Username The name of the user is fixed as either admin or guest and is not configurable. Old Password Type your current password. New Password The password for management access.
(Length: 5-32 characters, case sensitive) Confirm New Password Enter the password again for verification. Country Code Configures the APs country code, which identifies the country of operation and sets the authorized radio channels. 34 Chapter 3 | System Settings IPv4 Address Caution: You must set the country code to the country of operation. Setting the country code restricts operation of the AP to the radio channels and transmit power levels permitted for wireless networks in the specified country. IPv4 Address Configuring the AP with an IPv4 address expands your ability to manage the AP. A number of the APs features depend on IPv4 addressing to operate. You can use the web browser interface to access IPv4 addressing only if the access point already has an IPv4 address that is reachable through your network. By default, the AP will be not be automatically configured with IPv4 settings from a Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) server. The default IPv4 address for management access is 192.168.1.10, with a subnet mask 255.255.255.0. Figure 10: IPv4 Configuration The following items are displayed on this page:
DHCP Status Enables/disables DHCP on the access point. IP Address Specifies an IP address for the access point. Valid IP addresses consist of four decimal numbers, 0 to 255, separated by periods. (Default:
192.168.2.10.) Subnet Mask Indicates the local subnet mask. (Default: 255.255.255.0) Default Gateway The default gateway is the IP address of the router for the access point, which is used if the requested destination address is not on the local subnet. 35 Chapter 3 | System Settings IPv6 Address If you have management stations, DNS, RADIUS, or other network servers located on another subnet, type the IP address of the default gateway router in the text field provided. Primary and Secondary DNS Address The IP address of Domain Name Servers on the network. A DNS maps numerical IP addresses to domain names and can be used to identify network hosts by familiar names instead of the IP addresses. If you have one or more DNS servers located on the local network, type the IP addresses in the text fields provided. Management IP The IPv4 address of the AP through which you can access management interfaces. Management IP Address Specifies an IPv4 address for management of the access point. (Default: 192.168.1.10.) Management Subnet Mask Indicates the local subnet mask.
(Default: 255.255.255.0) This section describes how to configure an IPv6 interface for management access over the network. This AP supports both IPv4 and IPv6, and can be managed through either of these address types. By default, the AP will be not be automatically configured with IPv6 settings from a DHCPv6 server. The default IPv6 address is 2001:db8::1, subnet mask 64 and a default gateway of 2001:db8::2. Figure 11: IPv6 Configuration IPv6 Address The following items are displayed on this page:
36 Chapter 3 | System Settings RADIUS Settings DHCP Status Enables/disables DHCPv6 on the access point. IP Address Specifies an IPv6 address for management of the access point.
(Default: 2001:db8::1) Subnet Mask Indicates the local subnet mask. (Default: 64) Default Gateway The default gateway is the IPv6 address of the router for the access point, which is used if the requested destination address is not on the local subnet. If you have management stations, DNS, RADIUS, or other network servers located on another subnet, type the IPv6 address of the default gateway router in the text field provided. Primary and Secondary DNS Address The IPv6 address of Domain Name Servers on the network. A DNS maps numerical IPv6 addresses to domain names and can be used to identify network hosts by familiar names instead of the IPv6 addresses. If you have one or more DNS servers located on the local network, type the IPv6 addresses in the text fields provided. RADIUS Settings Remote Authentication Dial-in User Service (RADIUS) is an authentication protocol that uses software running on a central server to control access to RADIUS-aware devices on the network. An authentication server contains a database of user credentials for each user that requires access to the network. Primary and Secondary RADIUS Server Setup A primary RADIUS server must be specified for the access point to implement IEEE 802.1X network access control and Wi-Fi Protected Access (WPA) wireless security. A secondary RADIUS server may also be specified as a backup should the primary server fail or become inaccessible. In addition, you can configure a RADIUS Accounting server to receive user-session accounting information from the access point. RADIUS Accounting can be used to provide valuable information on user activity in the network. This guide assumes that you have already configured RADIUS server(s) to support the access point. Configuration of RADIUS server software is beyond the scope of this guide, refer to the documentation provided with the RADIUS server software. 37 Chapter 3 | System Settings RADIUS Settings Figure 12: RADIUS Settings The following items are displayed on the RADIUS Settings page:
RADIUS Status Enables/disables the primary RADIUS server. IP Address Specifies the IP address or host name of the RADIUS server. Port (1024-65535) The UDP port number used by the RADIUS server for authentication messages. (Range: 1024-65535; Default: 1812) Key A shared text string used to encrypt messages between the access point and the RADIUS server. Be sure that the same text string is specified on the RADIUS server. Do not use blank spaces in the string. (Maximum length: 255 characters) RADIUS Accounting The following items are displayed on the RADIUS Settings page:
Account Status Enables/disables RADIUS accounting. IP Address Specifies the IP address or host name of the RADIUS accounting server. 38 Chapter 3 | System Settings System Time Port (1024-65535) The UDP port number used by the RADIUS accounting server for authentication messages. (Range: 1024-65535; Default: 1813) Key A shared text string used to encrypt messages between the access point and the RADIUS accounting server. Be sure that the same text string is specified on the RADIUS server. Do not use blank spaces in the string. (Maximum length:
255 characters) Interim Update Timeout (60-86400) The interval between transmitting accounting updates to the RADIUS server. (Range: 60-86400; Default: 300 seconds) Simple Network Time Protocol (SNTP) allows the access point to set its internal clock based on periodic updates from a time server (SNTP or NTP). Maintaining an accurate time on the access point enables the system log to record meaningful dates and times for event entries. If the clock is not set, the access point will only record the time from the factory default set at the last bootup. The access point acts as an SNTP client, periodically sending time synchronization requests to specific time servers. You can configure up to two time server IP addresses. The access point will attempt to poll each server in the configured sequence. Figure 13: SNTP Settings System Time 39 Chapter 3 | System Settings VLAN Configuration SNTP Server Settings Configures the access point to operate as an SNTP client. When enabled, at least one time server IP address must be specified. SNTP Status Enables/disables SNTP. (Default: enabled) Primary Server The IP address of an SNTP or NTP time server that the access point attempts to poll for a time update. Secondary Server The IP address of a secondary SNTP or NTP time server. The access point first attempts to update the time from the primary server; if this fails it attempts an update from the secondary server. Time Zone Setting SNTP uses Greenwich Mean Time, or GMT (sometimes referred to as Coordinated Universal Time, or UTC) based on the time at the Earths prime meridian, zero degrees longitude. To display a time corresponding to your local time, you must indicate the number of hours your time zone is located before (east) or after (west) GMT. Time Zone Select from the scroll down list the locale you are situated most close to, for example for New York, select (GMT-05) Eastern Time (US & Canada). Daylight Saving Settings The access point provides a way to automatically adjust the system clock for Daylight Savings Time changes. To use this feature you must define the month and date to begin and to end the change from standard time. During this period the system clock is set back by one hour. Daylight Saving Status Enalbes/disables daylight savings time. (Default:
disabled) When enabled, set the month, day, and week to start and stop the daylight savings time. VLAN Configuration VLANs (virtual local area networks) are turned off by default when first installing the access point. If turned on they will automatically tag any packets received by the LAN port before sending them on to the relevant VAP (virtual access point). The access point can employ VLAN tagging support to control access to network resources and increase security. VLANs separate traffic passing between the access point, associated clients, and the wired network. There can be a default VLAN for each VAP (Virtual Access Point) interface, and a management VLAN for the access point. 40 Chapter 3 | System Settings VLAN Configuration Note the following points about the access points VLAN support:
The management VLAN is for managing the access point through remote management tools, such as the web interface, SSH, SNMP, or Telnet. The access point only accepts management traffic that is tagged with the specified management VLAN ID. All wireless clients associated to the access point are assigned to a VLAN. Wireless clients are assigned to the default VLAN for the VAP interface with which they are associated. The access point only allows traffic tagged with default VLAN IDs to access clients associated on each VAP interface. When VLAN support is enabled on the access point, traffic passed to the wired network is tagged with the appropriate VLAN ID, either a VAP default VLAN ID, or the management VLAN ID. Traffic received from the wired network must also be tagged with one of these known VLAN IDs. Received traffic that has an unknown VLAN ID or no VLAN tag is dropped. When VLAN support is disabled, the access point does not tag traffic passed to the wired network and ignores the VLAN tags on any received frames. Note: Before enabling VLAN tagging on the access point, be sure to configure the attached network switch port to support tagged VLAN frames from the access points management VLAN ID and default VLAN IDs. Otherwise, connectivity to the access point will be lost when you enable the VLAN feature. Figure 14: Setting the VLAN Identity The following items are displayed on this page:
VLAN Classification Enables VLAN packet tagging. (Default: disabled) Management VLAN ID The VLAN ID that traffic must have to be able to manage the access point. (Range 1-4094; Default: 4093) Native VLAN ID The VLAN ID assigned to untagged packets received by the LAN port. (Range: 1-4094; Default: 1) 41 Chapter 3 | System Settings System Logs System Logs The access point can be configured to send event and error messages to a System Log Server. The system clock can also be synchronized with a time server, so that all the messages sent to the Syslog server are stamped with the correct time and date. Figure 15: System Log Settings The following items are displayed on this page:
Syslog Status Enables/disables the logging of error messages. (Default:
enabled) Server 1~4 Enables the sending of log messages to a Syslog server host. Up to four Syslog servers are supported on the access point. (Default: disabled) IP The IP address or name of a Syslog server. (Server 1 Default: 10.7.16.98;
Server 2 Default: 10.7.13.48; Server 3 Default: 10.7.123.123; Server 4 Default:
10.7.13.77) UDP Port The UDP port used by a Syslog server. (Range: 514 or 11024-
65535; Server 1~2 Default: 514; Server 3 Default: 6553; Server 4 Default: 5432) Logging Console Enables the logging of error messages to the console.
(Default: disabled) 42 Chapter 3 | System Settings Quick Start Wizard Logging Level Sets the minimum severity level for event logging. (Default:
Debug) The system allows you to limit the messages that are logged by specifying a minimum severity level. The following table lists the error message levels from the most severe (Emergency) to least severe (Debug). The message levels that are logged include the specified minimum level up to the Emergency level. Table 1: Logging Levels Error Level Emergency Alerts Critical Error Warning Notice Description System unusable Immediate action needed Critical conditions (e.g., memory allocation, or free memory error -
resource exhausted) Error conditions (e.g., invalid input, default used) Warning conditions (e.g., return false, unexpected return) Normal but significant condition, such as cold start Informational Informational messages only Debug Debugging messages Quick Start Wizard The Quick Start menu item is described in the preceding chapter, see Web Quick Start on page 26. 43 Chapter 3 | System Settings System Resource System Resource The System Resource page displays information on the APs current CPU and memory utilization. This page also allows you to set thresholds for the CPU and memory usage, where an SNMP trap can be sent as an alert. Figure 16: System Resource The following items are displayed on this page:
CPU Rising Threshold A high CPU utilization percentage above which a CPU Busy SNMP trap message is sent (only sent once). (Range: 1-100 percent, 0 is disabled; Default: 0) CPU Falling Threshold A low CPU utilization percentage below which a CPU Free SNMP trap message is sent once the Rising Threshold has been exceeded. (Range: 0 to less than the Rising Threshold; Default: 20) Memory Rising Threshold A high memory utilization threshold in Kbytes above which a Memory Overload SNMP trap message is sent (only sent once).
(Range: 1-113076 Kbytes, 0 is disabled; Default: 0) Memory Falling Threshold A low memory utilization threshold in Kbytes below which a Memory Free SNMP trap message is sent once the Rising Threshold has been exceeded. (Range: 0 to less than the Rising Threshold;
Default: 16000 Kbytes) Threshold Interval The interval in seconds between each CPU utilization check. (Range: 1 to 86400 seconds, 0 is disabled; Default: 0) CPU Status Displays detailed information on the current CPU utilization. 44 Chapter 3 | System Settings Bridge STP Configuration Memory Status Displays detailed information on the current memory utilization. Bridge STP Configuration Spanning Tree Protocol (STP) The Bridge menu enables configuration of the Spanning Tree Protocol (STP) and the address table aging time. The Spanning Tree Protocol (STP) can be used to detect and disable network loops, and to provide backup links between switches, bridges or routers. This allows the wireless bridge to interact with other bridging devices (that is, an STP-compliant switch, bridge or router) in your network to ensure that only one route exists between any two stations on the network, and provide backup links which automatically take over when a primary link goes down. STP uses a distributed algorithm to select a bridging device (STP-compliant switch, bridge or router) that serves as the root of the spanning tree network. It selects a root port on each bridging device (except for the root device) which incurs the lowest path cost when forwarding a packet from that device to the root device. Then it selects a designated bridging device from each LAN which incurs the lowest path cost when forwarding a packet from that LAN to the root device. All ports connected to designated bridging devices are assigned as designated ports. After determining the lowest cost spanning tree, it enables all root ports and designated ports, and disables all other ports. Network packets are therefore only forwarded between root ports and designated ports, eliminating any possible network loops. Once a stable network topology has been established, all bridges listen for Hello BPDUs (Bridge Protocol Data Units) transmitted from the root bridge. If a bridge does not get a Hello BPDU after a predefined interval (Maximum Age), the bridge assumes that the link to the root bridge is down. This bridge will then initiate negotiations with other bridges to reconfigure the network to reestablish a valid network topology. 45 Chapter 3 | System Settings Bridge STP Configuration Figure 17: Spanning Tree Protocol Bridge Sets STP bridge link parameters. The following items are displayed on the STP page:
Spanning Tree Protcol Enables/disables STP on the AP.
(Default: Disabled) Priority Used in selecting the root device, root port, and designated port. The device with the highest priority becomes the STP root device. However, if all devices have the same priority, the device with the lowest MAC address will then become the root device. (Note that lower numeric values indicate higher priority.) (Default:32768; Range: 0-65535) Max Age The maximum time (in seconds) a device can wait without receiving a configuration message before attempting to reconfigure. All device ports (except for designated ports) should receive configuration messages at regular intervals. Any port that ages out STP information (provided in the last configuration message) becomes the designated port for the attached LAN. If it is a root port, a new root port is selected from among the device ports attached 46 Chapter 3 | System Settings Bridge STP Configuration to the network.
(Default: 20 seconds; Range: 6-40 seconds) Minimum: The higher of 6 or [2 x (Hello Time + 1)]. Maximum: The lower of 40 or [2 x (Forward Delay - 1)]
Hello Time Interval (in seconds) at which the root device transmits a configuration message. (Default: 2 seconds; Range: 1-10 seconds) Minimum: 1 Maximum: The lower of 10 or [(Max. Message Age / 2) -1]
Forwarding Delay The maximum time (in seconds) this device waits before changing states (i.e., discarding to learning to forwarding). This delay is required because every device must receive information about topology changes before it starts to forward frames. In addition, each port needs time to listen for conflicting information that would make it return to a discarding state; otherwise, temporary data loops might result. (Default: 15 seconds;
Range: 1-30 seconds) Minimum: The higher of 1 or [(Max. Message Age / 2) + 1]
Maximum: 30 Ethernet Interface Sets STP settings for the Ethernet port. Link Path Cost This parameter is used by the STP to determine the best path between devices. Therefore, lower values should be assigned to ports attached to faster media, and higher values assigned to ports with slower media. (Path cost takes precedence over port priority.) (Default: 4; Range: 1-65535) Link Port Priority Defines the priority used for this port in the Spanning Tree Protocol. If the path cost for all ports on a switch are the same, the port with the highest priority (i.e., lowest value) will be configured as an active link in the spanning tree. This makes a port with higher priority less likely to be blocked if the Spanning Tree Protocol is detecting network loops. Where more than one port is assigned the highest priority, the port with lowest numeric identifier will be enabled. (Default: 32; Range: 0-63) Wireless Interface Sets STP settings for the radio interface. Index Describes the VAP in question. Link Path Cost This parameter is used by the STP to determine the best path between devices. Therefore, lower values should be assigned to ports attached to faster media, and higher values assigned to ports with slower media. (Path cost takes precedence over port priority.) (Default: 19; Range: 1-65535.) 47 Chapter 3 | System Settings Bridge STP Configuration Link Port Priority Defines the priority used for this port in the Spanning Tree Protocol. If the path cost for all ports on a switch are the same, the port with the highest priority (i.e., lowest value) will be configured as an active link in the spanning tree. This makes a port with higher priority less likely to be blocked if the Spanning Tree Protocol is detecting network loops. Where more than one port is assigned the highest priority, the port with lowest numeric identifier will be enabled. (Default: 32; Range: 0-63) Bridge Configuration Use the Bridge Configuration page to configure the aging time for the MAC address table. The AP stores the MAC addresses for all known devices. All the addresses learned by monitoring traffic are stored in a dynamic address table. This information is used to pass traffic directly between inbound and outbound interfaces. Figure 18: Bridge Configuration The following items are displayed on the STP page:
mac aging time The time after which a learned MAC address is discarded.
(Range: 10-1000000 seconds; Default: 300 seconds) 48 4 Management Settings This chapter describes management access settings on the access point. It includes the following sections:
Remote Management Settings on page 49 Access Limitation on page 51 Simple Network Management Protocol on page 52 Remote Management Settings The Web, Telnet, and SNMP management interfaces are enabled and open to all IP addresses by default. To provide more security for management access to the access point, specific interfaces can be disabled and management restricted to a single IP address or a limited range of IP addresses. Once you specify an IP address or range of addresses, access to management interfaces is restricted to the specified addresses. If anyone tries to access a management interface from an unauthorized address, the access point will reject the connection. Telnet is a remote management tool that can be used to configure the access point from anywhere in the network. However, Telnet is not secure from hostile attacks. The Secure Shell (SSH) can act as a secure replacement for Telnet. The SSH protocol uses generated public keys to encrypt all data transfers passing between the access point and SSH-enabled management station clients and ensures that data traveling over the network arrives unaltered. Clients can then securely use the local user name and password for access authentication. Note that SSH client software needs to be installed on the management station to access the access point for management via the SSH protocol. Both HTTP and HTTPS service can be enabled independently. If you enable HTTPS, you must indicate this in the URL: https://device:port_number]
When you start HTTPS, the connection is established in this way:
The client authenticates the server using the servers digital certificate. The client and server negotiate a set of security protocols to use for the connection. 49 Chapter 4 | Management Settings Remote Management Settings The client and server generate session keys for encrypting and decrypting data. The client and server establish a secure encrypted connection. A padlock icon should appear in the status bar for Internet Explorer. Figure 19: Remote Management The following items are displayed on Admin Interface page:
Telnet Access Enables/disables management access from Telnet interfaces.
(Default: enabled) Telnet Access Port Sets the specified Telnet port for communication.
(Default: 23) SSH Server Enables/disables management access from SSH Servers.
(Default: enabled) SSH Server Port Sets the specified SSH Server port for communication.
(Default: 22) HTTP Access Enables/disables management access from any IP address.
(Default: enabled) HTTP Timeout Specifies the time after which the HTTP connection will be lost with a period of inactivity. (Default: 1800 seconds; Range: 1-1800 seconds;
0=disabled) 50 Chapter 4 | Management Settings Access Limitation HTTP Port Specifies the HTTP port for IP connectivity. (Default: 80; Range 1024-65535) HTTPS Server Enables/disables management access from a HTTPS server.
(Default: enabled) HTTPS Port Specifies the HTTPS port for secure IP connectivity. (Default:
443; Range 1024-65535) SNMP Access Enables management access through SNMP. For more information on SNMP access, see Simple Network Management Protocol on page 52. (Default: enabled) Access Limitation The Access Limitation page limits management access to the access point from specified IP addresses or wireless clients. Figure 20: Access Limitation The following items are displayed on the Access Limitation page:
IP Management Control Any IP Indicates that any IP address is allowed management access. Single IP Specifies a single IP address that is allowed management access. Multiple IP Specifies an address range as defined by the entered IP address and subnet mask. For example, IP address 192.168.1.6 and subnet mask 255.255.255.0, defines all IP addresses from 192.168.1.1 to 192.168.1.254. 51 Chapter 4 | Management Settings Simple Network Management Protocol IP Address Specifies the IP address. Subnet Mask Specifies the subnet mask in the form 255.255.255.x Restrict Management Enable/Disable Enables/disables management of the device by a wireless client. (Default: disabled) DHCP Filter Enable/Disable Enables/disables the AP and wireless clients from obtaining an IP address from a DHCP server installed on wireless client. (Default: disabled) Simple Network Management Protocol Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) is a communication protocol designed specifically for managing devices on a network. Equipment commonly managed with SNMP includes switches, routers and host computers. SNMP is typically used to configure these devices for proper operation in a network environment, as well as to monitor them to evaluate performance or detect potential problems. Managed devices supporting SNMP contain software, which runs locally on the device and is referred to as an agent. A defined set of variables, known as managed objects, is maintained by the SNMP agent and used to manage the device. These objects are defined in a Management Information Base (MIB) that provides a standard presentation of the information controlled by the agent. SNMP defines both the format of the MIB specifications and the protocol used to access this information over the network. The access point includes an onboard agent that supports SNMP versions 1, 2c, and 3 clients. This agent continuously monitors the status of the access point, as well as the traffic passing to and from wireless clients. A network management station can access this information using SNMP management software that is compliant with MIB II. To implement SNMP management, the access point must first have an IP address and subnet mask, configured either manually or dynamically. Access to the onboard agent using SNMP v1 and v2c is controlled by community strings. To communicate with the access point, the management station must first submit a valid community string for authentication. Access to the access point using SNMP v3 provides additional security features that cover message integrity, authentication, and encryption; as well as controlling notifications that are sent to specified user targets. SNMP Basic Settings The access point SNMP agent must be enabled to function (for versions 1, 2c, and 3 clients). Management access using SNMP v1 and v2c also requires community 52 Chapter 4 | Management Settings Simple Network Management Protocol strings to be configured for authentication. Trap notifications can be enabled and sent to up to four management stations. Figure 21: SNMP Basic Settings The following items are displayed on this page:
SNMP Enables or disables SNMP management access and also enables the access point to send SNMP traps (notifications). (Default: Disable) System Location A text string that describes the system location.
(Maximum length: 255 characters) System Contact A text string that describes the system contact. (Maximum length: 255 characters) Read-Only Community Defines the SNMP community access string that has read-only access. Authorized management stations are only able to retrieve MIB objects. (Maximum length: 23 characters, case sensitive; Default: public) Read-Write Community Defines the SNMP community access string that has read/write access. Authorized management stations are able to both retrieve and modify MIB objects. (Maximum length: 23 characters, case sensitive; Default: private) 53 Chapter 4 | Management Settings Simple Network Management Protocol SNMP Trap Settings Traps indicating status changes are issued by the AP to specified trap managers. You must specify trap managers so that key events are reported by the AP to your management station (using network management platforms). Figure 22: SNMP Trap Settings The following items are displayed on this page:
Trap Destination Specifies the recipient of SNMP notifications. Enter the IP address or the host name. (Host Name: 1 to 63 characters, case sensitive) Community The community string sent with the notification operation.
(Maximum length: 23 characters, case sensitive; Default: public) Action Adds a new SNMP trap destination to the list. Trap Destination List Lists the configured SNMP trap destinations. Trap Configuration Enables or disables trap status. sysSystemUp: The access point is up and running. sysSystemDown: The access point is about to shutdown and reboot. Save Trap Config Applies the new parameters and saves them to RAM memory. Also prompts a screen to inform you when it has taken affect. Clicking OK returns to the home page. Changes will not be saved upon a reboot unless the running configuration file is saved. 54 Chapter 4 | Management Settings Simple Network Management Protocol View Access Control Model To configure SNMPv3 management access to the AP, follow these steps:
1. Specify read and write access views for the AP MIB tree. 2. Configure SNMP user groups with the required security model (that is, SNMP v1, v2c, or v3) and security level (authentication and privacy). 3. Assign SNMP users to groups, along with their specific authentication and privacy passwords. Figure 23: SNMP VACM Creating Views SNMPv3 views are used to restrict user access to specified portions of the MIB tree. The are no predefined views by default. The following items are displayed on the VACM page. View Name The name of the SNMP view. (Range: 1-32 characters) Type Indicates if the object identifier of a branch within the MIB tree is included or excluded from the SNMP view. OID Allows you to configure the object identifiers of branches within the MIB tree. Wild cards can be used to mask a specific portion of the OID string. Mask (option) A hexadecimal value with each bit masking the corresponding ID in the MIB subtree. A 1 in the mask indicates an exact match and a 0 indicates a wild card. For example, a mask value of 0xFFBF provides a bit mask 55 Chapter 4 | Management Settings Simple Network Management Protocol 1111 1111 1011 1111. If applied to the subtree 1.3.6.1.2.1.2.2.1.1.23, the zero corresponds to the 10th subtree ID. When there are more subtree IDs than bits in the mask, the mask is padded with ones. View List Shows the currently configured object identifiers of branches within the MIB tree that define the SNMP view. Creating Groups An SNMPv3 group sets the access policy for its assigned users, restricting them to specific read, write, and notify views. You can create new groups to map a set of SNMP users to SNMP views. Group Name The name of the SNMP group. (Range: 1-32 characters) Security Level The security level used for the group:
noAuthNoPriv There is no authentication or encryption used in SNMP communications. AuthNoPriv SNMP communications use authentication, but the data is not encrypted. AuthPriv SNMP communications use both authentication and encryption. Read View The configured view for read access. (Range: 1-32 characters) Write View The configured view for write access. (Range: 1-32 characters) SNMPv3 Users The access point allows multiple SNMP v3 users to be configured. Each SNMPv3 user is defined by a unique name. Users must be configured with a specific security level and assigned to a group. The SNMPv3 group restricts users to a specific read, write, or notify view. Figure 24: Configuring SNMPv3 Users 56 Chapter 4 | Management Settings Simple Network Management Protocol The following items are displayed on this page:
User Name The SNMPv3 user name. (32 characters maximum) Group The SNMPv3 group name. Auth Type The authentication type used for the SNMP user; either MD5 or none. When MD5 is selected, enter a password in the corresponding Passphrase field. Auth Passphrase The authentication password or key associated with the authentication and privacy settings. A minimum of eight plain text characters is required. Priv Type The data encryption type used for the SNMP user; either DES or none. When DES is selected, enter a key in the corresponding Passphrase field. Priv Passphrase The password or key associated with the authentication and privacy settings. A minimum of eight plain text characters is required. Action Click the Add button to add a new user to the list. Click the edit button to change details of an existing user. Click the Del button to remove a user from the list. Note: Users must be assigned to groups that have the same security levels. For example, a user who has Auth Type and Priv Type configured to MD5 and DES respectively (that it, uses both authentication and data encryption) must be assigned to the RWPriv group. If this same user were instead assigned to the read-
only (RO) group, the user would not be able to access the database. SNMPv3 Targets An SNMP v3 notification Target ID is specified by the SNMP v3 user, IP address, and UDP port. A user-defined filter can also be assigned to specific targets to limit the notifications received to specific MIB objects. (Note that the filter must first be configured. See SNMPv3 Notification Filters on page 58.) To configure a new notification receiver target, define the parameters and select a filter, if required. Note that the SNMP v3 user name must first be defined (See SNMPv3 Users on page 56.) 57 Chapter 4 | Management Settings Simple Network Management Protocol Figure 25: SNMPv3 Targets The following items are displayed on this page:
Target ID A user-defined name that identifies a receiver of notifications.
(Maximum length: 32 characters) IP Address Specifies the IP address of the receiving management station. UDP Port The UDP port that is used on the receiving management station for notification messages. SNMP User The defined SNMP v3 user that is to receive notification messages. Notification Filter The name of a user-defined notification filter that is applied to the target. SNMPv3 Notification Filters SNMP v3 users can be configured to receive notification messages from the access point. An SNMP Target ID is created that specifies the SNMP v3 user, IP address, and UDP port. A user-defined notification filter can be created so that specific notifications can be prevented from being sent to particular targets. Figure 26: SNMP Notification Filter 58 Chapter 4 | Management Settings Simple Network Management Protocol The following items are displayed on this page:
Filter ID A user-defined name that identifies the filter. (Maximum length: 32 characters) Subtree Specifies MIB subtree to be filtered. The MIB subtree must be defined in the form .1.3.6.1 and always start with a .. Type Indicates if the filter is to include or exclude the MIB subtree objects from the filter. Note that MIB objects included in the filter are not sent to the receiving target and objects excluded are sent. By default all traps are sent, so you can first use an include filter entry for all trap objects. Then use exclude entries for the required trap objects to send to the target. Note that the filter entries are applied in the sequence that they are defined. Action Adds the notification filter. 59 5 Advanced Settings Local Bridge Filter This chapter describes advanced settings on the access point. It includes the following sections:
Local Bridge Filter on page 60 Link Layer Discovery Protocol on page 61 Access Control Lists on page 63 Link Integrity on page 66 The access point can employ network traffic frame filtering to control access to network resources and increase security. You can prevent communications between wireless clients and prevent access point management from wireless clients. Also, you can block specific Ethernet traffic from being forwarded by the access point. The Local Bridge Filter sets the global mode for wireless-to-wireless communications between clients associated to Virtual AP (VAP) interfaces on the access point. (Default: Disabled) Figure 27: Local Bridge Filter The following items are displayed on this page:
Disabled All clients can communicate with each other through the access point. 60 Chapter 5 | Advanced Settings Link Layer Discovery Protocol Prevent Intra VAP client communication When enabled, clients associated with a specific VAP interface cannot establish wireless communications with each other. Clients can communicate with clients associated to other VAP interfaces. Prevent Inter and Intra VAP client communication When enabled, clients cannot establish wireless communications with any other client, either those associated to the same VAP interface or any other VAP interface. Link Layer Discovery Protocol This page allows you to configure the Link Layer Discovery Protocol (LLDP). LLDP allows devices in the local broadcast domain to share information about themselves. LLDP-capable devices periodically transmit information in messages called Type Length Value (TLV) fields to neighbor devices. Advertised information is represented in Type Length Value (TLV) format according to the IEEE 802.1ab standard, and can include details such as device identification, capabilities and configuration settings. This information can be used by SNMP applications to simplify troubleshooting, enhance network management, and maintain an accurate network topology. Figure 28: LLDP Settings The following items are displayed on this page:
Disable/Enable Disables/Enables LLDP on the access point. Message Transmission Hold Time Configures the time-to-live (TTL) value sent in LLDP advertisements as shown in the formula below. (Range: 2-10;
Default: 4) 61 Chapter 5 | Advanced Settings Link Layer Discovery Protocol The time-to-live tells the receiving LLDP agent how long to retain all information pertaining to the sending LLDP agent if it does not transmit updates in a timely manner. TTL in seconds is based on the following rule:
(Transmission Interval * Hold time) 65536. Therefore, the default TTL is 4*30 =
120 seconds. Message Transmission Interval (seconds) Configures the periodic transmit interval for LLDP advertisements. (Range: 5-32768 seconds; Default: 30 seconds) This attribute must comply with the following rule: (Transmission Interval *
Hold Time) 65536, and Transmission Interval >= (4 * Delay Interval) ReInitial Delay Time (seconds) Configures the delay before attempting to re-initialize after LLDP ports are disabled or the link goes down. (Range: 1-10 seconds; Default: 2 seconds) When LLDP is re-initialized on a port, all information in the remote systems LLDP MIB associated with this port is deleted. Transmission Delay Value (seconds) Configures a delay between the successive transmission of advertisements initiated by a change in local LLDP MIB variables. (Range: 1-8192 seconds; Default: 4 seconds) The transmit delay is used to prevent a series of successive LLDP transmissions during a short period of rapid changes in local LLDP MIB objects, and to increase the probability that multiple, rather than single changes, are reported in each transmission. This attribute must comply with the rule: (4 * Delay Interval) Transmission Interval 62 Chapter 5 | Advanced Settings Access Control Lists Access Control Lists Access Control Lists allow you to configure a list of wireless client MAC addresses that are not authorized to access the network. A database of MAC addresses can be configured locally on the access point. Source Address Settings The ACL Source Address Settings page enables traffic filtering based on the source MAC address in the data frame. Figure 29: Source ACLs The following items are displayed on this page:
SA Status Enables network traffic with specific source MAC addresses to be filtered (dropped) from the access point. MAC Address Specifies a source MAC address to filter, in the form xx.xx.xx.xx.xx.xx, or xx-xx-xx-xx-xx-xx. Action Selecting Add adds a new MAC address to the filter list, selecting delete removes the specified MAC address. Number Specifies the number associated with the MAC address. MAC Address Displays the configured source MAC address. 63 Chapter 5 | Advanced Settings Access Control Lists Destination Address Settings The ACL Destination Address Settings page enables traffic filtering based on the destination MAC address in the data frame. Figure 30: Destination ACLs The following items are displayed on this page:
DA Status Enables network traffic with specific destination MAC addresses to be filtered (dropped) from the access point. MAC Address Specifies a destination MAC address to filter, in the form xx:xx:xx:xx:xx:xx or xx-xx-xx-xx-xx-xx. Action Selecting Add adds a new MAC address to the filter list, selecting delete deletes the specified MAC address. Number Specifies the number of the MAC address in the filter table. MAC Address Displays the configured destination MAC address. 64 Chapter 5 | Advanced Settings Access Control Lists Ethernet Type The Ethernet Type Filter controls checks on the Ethernet type of all incoming and outgoing Ethernet packets against the protocol filtering table. (Default: Disabled) Figure 31: Ethernet Type Filter The following items are displayed on this page:
Disabled Access point does not filter Ethernet protocol types. Enabled Access point filters Ethernet protocol types based on the configuration of protocol types in the filter table. If the status of a protocol is set to ON, the protocol is filtered from the access point. Local Management Describes the Ethernet filter type. ISO Designator Describes the ISO Designator identifier. Filter Status Turns the filter on or off. 65 Chapter 5 | Advanced Settings Link Integrity Link Integrity The AP provides a link integrity feature that can be used to ensure that wireless clients are connected to resources on the wired network. The AP does this by periodically sending Ping messages to a host device in the wired Ethernet network. If the AP detects that the connection to the host has failed, it can disable the radio interfaces, forcing clients to find and associate with another AP. When the connection to the host is restored, the AP re-enables the radio interfaces. Figure 32: Link Integrity The following items are displayed on this page:
Link Integrity Enables the feature. (Default: Disabled) Destination IP The link host IP address on the wired network to which Ping messages are sent. (Default: 192.168.2.254) Detect Interval The interval time between each Ping sent to the host IP address.(Range: 10-86400 seconds; Default: 60 seconds) Response Timeout The time to wait for a response to a Ping message.
(Range: 1-10 seconds; Default: 2 seconds) Retry Count if no response The number of consecutive failed Ping counts before the link is determined as lost. (Range: 1-99; Default: 5) Link Fail Action When a link integrity test fails you can optionally disable either radio interface. Note that the shutdown action does not apply for a VAP interface set to WDS station mode. (Default: Disabled) 66 6 Wireless Settings This chapter describes wireless settings on the access point. It includes the following sections:
Authentication on page 68 Radio Settings on page 71 Virtual Access Points (VAPs) on page 75 Rogue AP Detection on page 84 Wi-Fi Multimedia (WMM) on page 86 67 Chapter 6 | Wireless Settings Authentication Authentication Wireless clients can be authenticated for network access by checking their MAC address against the local database configured on the access point, or by using a database configured on a central RADIUS server. Alternatively, authentication can be implemented using the IEEE 802.1X network access control protocol. You can configure a list of the MAC addresses for wireless clients that are authorized to access the network. This provides a basic level of authentication for wireless clients attempting to gain access to the network. A database of authorized MAC addresses can be stored locally on the access point or remotely on a central RADIUS server. (Default: Local MAC) Local MAC Authentication Configures the local MAC authentication database. The MAC database provides a mechanism to take certain actions based on a wireless clients MAC address. The MAC list can be configured to allow or deny network access to specific clients. Figure 33: Local Authentication The following items are displayed on Authentication page:
MAC Authentication Selects between, disabled, Local MAC authentication and RADIUS authentication. 68 Chapter 6 | Wireless Settings Authentication Local MAC The MAC address of the associating station is compared against the local database stored on the access point. The Local MAC Authentication section enables the local database to be set up. System Default Specifies a default action for all unknown MAC addresses
(that is, those not listed in the local MAC database). Deny: Blocks access for all MAC addresses except those listed in the local database as Allow. Allow: Permits access for all MAC addresses except those listed in the local database as Deny. MAC Authentication Settings Enters specified MAC addresses and permissions into the local MAC database. MAC Address: Physical address of a client. Enter six pairs of hexadecimal digits separated by hyphens; for example, 00-90-D1-12-AB-89. Permission: Select Allow to permit access or Deny to block access. Add/Delete: Adds or deletes the specified MAC address and permission setting into or from the local database. MAC Authentication Table Displays current entries in the local MAC database. RADIUS MAC Authentication The MAC address of the associating station is sent to a configured RADIUS server for authentication. When using a RADIUS authentication server for MAC address authentication, the server must first be configured on the RADIUS page. Figure 34: RADIUS Authentication The following items are displayed on Authentication page:
MAC Authentication Selects between, disabled, Local MAC authentication and RADIUS authentication. 69 Chapter 6 | Wireless Settings Authentication RADIUS MAC The MAC address of the associating station is compared against the RADIUS server database. The RADIUS MAC Authentication section enables the RADIUS database to be set up. Session Timeout The time period after which a connected client must be re-authenticated. During the re-authentication process of verifying the clients credentials on the RADIUS server, the client remains connected the network. Only if re-authentication fails is network access blocked. (Default: 0 means disabled; Range: 30-65535 seconds) 70 Radio Settings Chapter 6 | Wireless Settings Radio Settings The IEEE 802.11n wireless interfaces include configuration options for radio signal characteristics and wireless security features. The AP can operate in several radio modes, mixed 802.11b/g/n (2.4 GHz), or mixed 802.11a/n (5 GHz). Note that the radios can operate at 2.4 GHz and 5 GHz at the same time. The web interface identifies the radio configuration pages as:
Radio 0 the 2.4 GHz 802.11b/g/n radio interface Radio 1 the 5 GHz 802.11a/n radio interface Each radio supports 16 virtual access point (VAP) interfaces, referred to as VAP 0 ~
VAP 15. Each VAP functions as a separate access point, and can be configured with its own Service Set Identification (SSID) and security settings. However, most radio signal parameters apply to all VAP interfaces. The configuration options are nearly identical, and are therefore both covered in this section of the manual. Traffic to specific VAPs can be segregated based on user groups or application traffic. The clients associate with each VAP in the same way as they would with separate physical access points. The AP supports up to a total of 127 wireless clients across all VAP interfaces per radio. Figure 35: Radio Settings 71 Chapter 6 | Wireless Settings Radio Settings The following items are displayed on this page:
High Throughput Mode The access point provides a channel bandwidth of 20 MHz by default giving an 802.11g connection speed of 54 Mbps and a 802.11n connection speed of up to 108 Mbps, and ensures backward compliance for slower 802.11b devices. Setting the HT Channel Bandwidth to 40 MHz increases connection speed for 802.11n up to 300 Mbps. HT40plus indicates that the secondary channel is above the primary channel. HT40minus indicates that the secondary channel is below the primary channel.
(Default: HT20; Range:HT20, HT40PLUS, HT40MINUS) Radio Channel The radio channel that the access point uses to communicate with wireless clients. When multiple access points are deployed in the same area, set the channel on neighboring access points at least five channels apart to avoid interference with each other. For example, for 11g/n HT20 mode you can deploy up to three access points in the same area using channels 1, 6, 11. Note that wireless clients automatically set the channel to the same as that used by the access point to which it is linked. (The available channels are dependent on the Radio Mode, High Throughput Mode, and Country Code settings.) Auto Channel Selecting Auto Select enables the access point to automatically select an unoccupied radio channel. Interference Channel Recover Rescans all channels when interference is detected on the current channel, and then changes to a clear channel.
(Default: Disabled) Antenna Sets the antenna options for this AP to system default. Transmit Power Adjusts the power of the radio signals transmitted from the access point. The higher the transmission power, the farther the transmission range. Power selection is not just a trade off between coverage area and maximum supported clients. You also have to ensure that high-power signals do not interfere with the operation of other radio devices in the service area.
(Range - Percentage mode: min, 12.5%, 25%, 50%, 100%; Default: 100%)
(Range - dBm mode: 3-20 dBm; Default: 18 dBm) Maximum Association Clients The total maximum number of clients that may associate with the radio. (Range: 1-127; Default: 127) Radio Mode Defines the radio operation mode. Radio 0 (2.4 GHz Radio) Default: 11n (g compatible); Options: 11n (b&g compatible), 11n (g compatible). Radio 1 (5 GHz Radio) Default: 11n; Options: 11n (a compatible), 11n. 72 Chapter 6 | Wireless Settings Radio Settings Note: Enabling the AP to communicate with 802.11b/g clients in both 802.11b/g/n Mixed and 802.11n modes also requires that HT Operation be set to HT20. Preamble Length The radio preamble (sometimes called a header) is a section of data at the head of a packet that contains information that the wireless device and client devices need when sending and receiving packets. You can set the radio preamble to long or short. A short preamble improves throughput performance, whereas a long preamble is required when legacy wireless devices are part of your network. Beacon Interval The rate at which beacon signals are transmitted from the access point. The beacon signals allow wireless clients to maintain contact with the access point. They may also carry power-management information. (Range:
40-3500 TUs; Default: 100 TUs) Data Beacon Rate (DTIM) The rate at which stations in sleep mode must wake up to receive broadcast/multicast transmissions. Known also as the Delivery Traffic Indication Map (DTIM) interval, it indicates how often the MAC layer forwards broadcast/multicast traffic, which is necessary to wake up stations that are using Power Save mode. The default value of 2 indicates that the access point will save all broadcast/multicast frames for the Basic Service Set (BSS) and forward them after every second beacon. Using smaller DTIM intervals delivers broadcast/multicast frames in a more timely manner, causing stations in Power Save mode to wake up more often and drain power faster. Using higher DTIM values reduces the power used by stations in Power Save mode, but delays the transmission of broadcast/
multicast frames. (Range: 1-255 beacons; Default: 1 beacon) RTS Threshold Sets the packet size threshold at which a Request to Send
(RTS) signal must be sent to a receiving station prior to the sending station starting communications. The access point sends RTS frames to a receiving station to negotiate the sending of a data frame. After receiving an RTS frame, the station sends a CTS (clear to send) frame to notify the sending station that it can start sending data. If the RTS threshold is set to 1, the access point always sends RTS signals. If set to 2346, the access point never sends RTS signals. If set to any other value, and the packet size equals or exceeds the RTS threshold, the RTS/CTS (Request to Send / Clear to Send) mechanism will be enabled. The access points contending for the medium may not be aware of each other. The RTS/CTS mechanism can solve this Hidden Node Problem. (Range: 1-2346 bytes: Default: 2346 bytes) Short Guard Interval The 802.11n draft specifies two guard intervals: 400ns
(short) and 800ns (long). Support of the 400ns GI is optional for transmit and receive. The purpose of a guard interval is to introduce immunity to 73 Chapter 6 | Wireless Settings Radio Settings propagation delays, echoes, and reflections to which digital data is normally very sensitive. Enabling the Short Guard Interval sets it to 400ns. (Default:
Disabled) Aggregate MAC Protocol Data Unit (A-MPDU) Enables / disables the sending of this four frame packet header for statistical purposes. (Default:
Enabled) A-MPDU Length Limit (1024-65535) Defines the A-MPDU length. (Default:
65535 bytes; Range: 1024-65535 bytes) Aggregate MAC Service Data Unit (A-MSDU) Enables / disables the sending of this four frame packet header for statistical purposes. (Default:
Enabled) Disable HT20/HT40 Coexistance Prevents 802.11n 20 MHz and 40 MHz channel bandwidths from operating together in the same network.
(Default: Disabled) Antenna Selection Sets the radio to use one or both antennas. (Options:
Left, Right, Right+Left; Default: Right+Left) Minimum CCK Rate (2.4 GHz radio only) The minimum CCK data rate at which the AP transmits packets on the wireless interface. (Options: 1, 2, 5.5, 11 Mbps; Default 1 Mbps) Minimum OFDM Rate The minimum OFDM data rate at which the AP transmits packets on the wireless interface. (Range: 6, 9, 12, 18, 24, 36, 48, 54 Mbps; Default 6 Mbps) Minimum Single Stream Rate The minimum 802.11n single stream data rate at which the AP transmits packets on the wireless interface. (Range: MCS0-
MCS7; Default MCS0) Minimum Double Stream Rate The minimum 802.11n double stream data rate at which the AP transmits packets on the wireless interface. (Range: MCS8-
MCS15; Default MCS8) Long Distance Setting When you have long-distance links in the wireless network, some timing parameters require an adjustment to maintain communications. Enter the approximate distance (in meters) of the client from the AP. Click on the Show Reference Data button to compute a set of recommended values for SlotTime, ACKTimeOut and CTSTimeOut. You can use the recommended values or enter your own values that work for your specific environment. Set Radio Sets all entered parameters. 74 Chapter 6 | Wireless Settings Virtual Access Points (VAPs) Virtual Access Points (VAPs) The AP supports up to 16 virtual access point (VAP) interfaces per radio, numbered 0 to 15. Each VAP functions as a separate access point, and can be configured with its own Service Set Identification (SSID) and security settings. However, most radio signal parameters apply to all VAP interfaces. The VAPs function similar to a VLAN, with each VAP mapped to its own default VLAN ID. Traffic to specific VAPs can be segregated based on user groups or application traffic. All VAPs can support up to a total of 127 wireless clients, whereby the clients associate with each VAP the same way as they would with separate physical access points. Note: The radio channel settings for the access point are limited by local regulations, which determine the number of channels that are available. See Operating Channels on page 46 for additional information on the maximum number channels available. Figure 36: VAP Settings The following items are displayed on this page:
VAP Number The number associated with the VAP, 0-15. SSID The name of the basic service set provided by a VAP interface. Clients that want to connect to the network through the access point must set their SSID to the same as that of an access point VAP interface. (Default:
EAP9112A_11BGN_# (0 to 15); Range: 1-32 characters) 75 Chapter 6 | Wireless Settings Virtual Access Points (VAPs) Enable Enables the specified VAP. (Default: Disabled) Status Displays the mode of the VAP. The default is set to "AP," for normal access point services. Edit Setting Click to open the page to configure basic and security settings for the selected VAP. QoS Setting Click to open the page to configure QoS settings for the selected VAP. Bandwidth Setting Click to open the page to configure bandwidth control for the selected VAP. VAP Basic Settings Sets the basic operating mode and other settings for the VAP. Each VAP can operate in one of three modes; normal AP mode, WDS-AP bridge AP mode, or WDS-STA bridge station mode. The default mode is AP for the VAP to support normal access point services. Note: For more information and examples for setting up WDS networks, see WDS Setup Examples on page 45. Note that the Basic Settings are the same for both AP and WDS-AP modes. Figure 37: VAP Basic Settings The following items are displayed on this page:
Closed System When enabled, the VAP does not include its SSID in beacon messages. Nor does it respond to probe requests from clients that do not include a fixed SSID. (Default: Disable) 76 Chapter 6 | Wireless Settings Virtual Access Points (VAPs) Mode Selects the mode in which the VAP will function. AP Mode: The VAP provides services to clients as a normal access point. WDS-AP Mode: The VAP operates as an access point in WDS mode, which accepts connections from APs in WDS-STA mode. WDS-STA Mode: The VAP operates as a client station in WDS mode, which connects to an access point VAP in WDS-AP mode. The user needs to specify the MAC address of the access point in WDS-AP mode to which it intends to connect. Maximum Association Clients The total maximum number of clients that may associate with this VAP. The maximum is 127, which is the total associated clients for all VAP interfaces. (Range: 1 to 127; Default 64) WLAN Client Association Preemption When enabled, the AP applies a priority order for associating clients when the maximum clients for the VAP has been reached. The priority order is 11n clients, 11a/g clients, then 11b clients. When the association pool for the VAP is full and the AP receives an association request from a high-priority (11n) client, the AP sends a disassociation to a lower priority client (11a/g or 11b) in order to be able to associate the high-
priority client. If there are no lower-priority clients to disassociate, the AP will reject the association request. (Default: Disabled) Association Timeout Interval The idle time interval (when no frames are sent) after which a client is disassociated from the VAP interface. (Range: 5-60 minutes; Default: 30 minutes) Authentication Timeout Interval The time within which the client should finish authentication before authentication times out.
(Range: 5-60 minutes; Default: 60 minutes) Default VLAN ID The VLAN ID assigned to wireless clients associated to the VAP interface that are not assigned to a specific VLAN by RADIUS server configuration. (Default: 1) DHCP Relay Server The IP address of the DHCP relay server. Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) can dynamically allocate an IP address and other configuration information to network clients that broadcast a request. To receive the broadcast request, the DHCP server would normally have to be on the same subnet as the client. However, when the access points DHCP relay agent is enabled, received client requests can be forwarded directly by the access point to a known DHCP server on another subnet. Responses from the DHCP server are returned to the access point, which then broadcasts them back to clients. (Default: 0.0.0.0 (disabled)) SSID The service set identifier for the VAP. 77 Chapter 6 | Wireless Settings Virtual Access Points (VAPs) Multicast Enhancement When a wireless client joins a multicast group, this feature converts multicast packets to unicast packets to improve multicast video quality. WDS-STA Mode Describes additional basic VAP settings when functioning in WDS-STA mode. Figure 38: WDS-STA Mode The following items are displayed in the VAP Basic Settings when WDS-AP mode is selected:
WDS-AP (Parent) SSID The SSID of the VAP on the connecting access point that is set to WDS-AP mode. WDS-AP (Parent) MAC The MAC address of the VAP on the connecting access point that is set to WDS-AP mode. Wireless Security Settings Describes the wireless security settings for each VAP, including association mode, encryption, and authentication. Note: For VAPs set to WDS-AP or WDS-STA mode, the security options are limited to WPA-PSK and WPA2-PSK only. Figure 39: Configuring VAPs - Security Settings 78 Chapter 6 | Wireless Settings Virtual Access Points (VAPs) The following items are available for VAP security:
Association Mode Defines the mode with which the VAP will associate with clients. Open System: The VAP is configured by default as an open system, which broadcasts a beacon signal including the configured SSID. Wireless clients with an SSID setting of any can read the SSID from the beacon and automatically set their SSID to allow immediate connection. WPA: WPA employs a combination of several technologies to provide an enhanced security solution for 802.11 wireless networks. WPA-PSK: For enterprise deployment, WPA requires a RADIUS authentication server to be configured on the wired network. However, for small office networks that may not have the resources to configure and maintain a RADIUS server, WPA provides a simple operating mode that uses just a pre-shared password for network access. The Pre-Shared Key mode uses a common password for user authentication that is manually entered on the access point and all wireless clients. The PSK mode uses the same TKIP packet encryption and key management as WPA in the enterprise, providing a robust and manageable alternative for small networks. WPA2: WPA was introduced as an interim solution for the vulnerability of WEP pending the ratification of the IEEE 802.11i wireless security standard. In effect, the WPA security features are a subset of the 802.11i standard. WPA2 includes the now ratified 802.11i standard, but also offers backward compatibility with WPA. Therefore, WPA2 includes the same 802.1X and PSK modes of operation and support for TKIP encryption. WPA2-PSK: Clients using WPA2 with a Pre-shared Key are accepted for authentication. WPA-WPA2 Mixed: Clients using WPA or WPA2 are accepted for authentication. WPA-WPA2-PSK-mixed: Clients using WPA or WPA2 with a Pre-shared Key are accepted for authentication. Encryption Method Selects an encryption method for the global key used for multicast and broadcast traffic, which is supported by all wireless clients. WEP: WEP is used as the multicast encryption cipher. You should select WEP only when both WPA and WEP clients are supported. TKIP: TKIP is used as the multicast encryption cipher. AES-CCMP: AES-CCMP is used as the multicast encryption cipher. AES-
CCMP is the standard encryption cipher required for WPA2. 79 Chapter 6 | Wireless Settings Virtual Access Points (VAPs) 802.1X The access point supports 802.1X authentication only for clients initiating the 802.1X authentication process (i.e., the access point does not initiate 802.1X authentication). For clients initiating 802.1X, only those successfully authenticated are allowed to access the network. For those clients not initiating 802.1X, access to the network is allowed after successful wireless association with the access point. The 802.1X mode allows access for clients not using WPA or WPA2 security. Pre-Authentication When using WPA2 over 802.1X, pre-authentication can be enabled, which allows clients to roam to a new access point and be quickly associated without performing full 802.1X authentication. (Default: Disabled) 802.1x Reauthentication Time The time period after which a connected client must be re-authenticated. During the re-authentication process of verifying the clients credentials on the RADIUS server, the client remains connected the network. Only if re-authentication fails is network access blocked. (Range: 0-65535 seconds; Default: 0 means disabled) Wired Equivalent Privacy (WEP) WEP provides a basic level of security, preventing unauthorized access to the network, and encrypting data transmitted between wireless clients and the VAP. WEP uses static shared keys (fixed-length hexadecimal or alphanumeric strings) that are manually distributed to all clients that want to use the network. WEP is the security protocol initially specified in the IEEE 802.11 standard for wireless communications. Unfortunately, WEP has been found to be seriously flawed and cannot be recommended for a high level of network security. For more robust wireless security, the access point provides Wi-Fi Protected Access (WPA) and WPA2 for improved data encryption and user authentication. Setting up shared keys enables the basic IEEE 802.11 Wired Equivalent Privacy
(WEP) on the access point to prevent unauthorized access to the network. If you choose to use WEP shared keys instead of an open system, be sure to define at least one static WEP key for user authentication and data encryption. Also, be sure that the WEP shared keys are the same for each client in the wireless network. All clients share the same keys, which are used for user authentication and data encryption. Up to four keys can be specified. 80 Chapter 6 | Wireless Settings Virtual Access Points (VAPs) Figure 40: WEP Configuration The following items are on this page for WEP configuration:
Default WEP Key Index Selects the key number to use for encryption for the VAP interface. If the clients have all four WEP keys configured to the same values, you can change the encryption key to any of the settings without having to update the client keys.
(Default: Key 1) Key Type Select the preferred method of entering WEP encryption keys for the VAP, either hexadecimal digits (Hex) or alphanumeric characters (ASCII). Key Length Select 64 Bit or 128 Bit key length. Note that the same size of encryption key must be supported on all wireless clients. (Default: 64 bit) Key Enter up to four WEP encryption keys for the VAP. Hex: Enter keys as 10 hexadecimal digits (0-9 and A-F) for 64 bit keys, or 26 hexadecimal digits for 128 bit keys. ASCII: Enter keys as 5 alphanumeric characters for 64 bit keys, or 13 alphanumeric characters for 128 bit keys. Note: Key index, type, and length must match that configured on the clients. 81 Chapter 6 | Wireless Settings Virtual Access Points (VAPs) VAP QoS Settings Click the QoS Setting link from the VAP Settings page to access the QoS priority mapping configuration for traffic on the VAP interface. Figure 41: QoS Settings The following items are displayed in the VAP QoS Settings page:
VAP to 802.1p Setting You can modify the VLAN priority tags of traffic on the VAP interface with a specified priority value. Requires the default VLAN ID for the VAP to be any other value than 1. Note: The VAP-to-802.1p priority QoS feature cannot be enabled together with the 802.1d-to-802.1p or 802.1d-to-DSCP features. 802.1d to 802.1p Setting Enables the mapping of traffic priority from WMM 802.1d priorities to 802.1p VLAN tag priority values. The priorities are mapped according to the user-defined QoS Template map. Requires the default VLAN ID for the VAP to be any other value than 1. 802.1d to DSCP Setting Enables the mapping of traffic priority from WMM 802.1d priorities to IP DSCP priority values. The priorities are mapped according to the user-defined QoS Template map. 82 Chapter 6 | Wireless Settings Virtual Access Points (VAPs) Both 802.1d to 802.1p mapping and 802.1d to DSCP mapping can be enabled simultaneously when the default VLAN ID for the VAP is any other value than 1. When only 802.1d to DSCP mapping is enabled, the default VLAN ID for the VAP must be set to 1. QoS Template Enables up to eight user-defined priority mapping tables to be configued. The tables are used to map the WMM 802.1d priorities to 802.1p/
DSCP priorities. Click the Edit link in the list to define a template priority map. Figure 42: QoS Template Setting The following items are displayed in the QoS Template Setting page:
QoS Template Name A descriptive name that identifies the mappng template. All eight templates have a default name that can be edited by the user (maximum 32 characters). Vap/802.1d (Default User Priority) The WMM 802.1d priority value in a tagged packet. 802.1p/DSCP (Retagged User Priority) The 802.1p or IP DSCP priority value that replaces the WMM 802.1d value in tagged packets. (Range: 0-7) 83 Chapter 6 | Wireless Settings Rogue AP Detection VAP Bandwidth Settings Click the Bandwidth Setting link from the VAP Settings page to configure rate limiting for traffic on the VAP interface. Figure 43: Bandwidth Settings The following items are displayed on this page:
Bandwidth Control on Uplink Setting Enables the rate limiting of traffic from the VAP interface as it is passed to the wired network. You can set a maximum rate in kbytes per second. (Range: 100-12000 Kbytes per second;
Default: 100 Kbytes per second) Bandwidth Control on Downlink Setting Enables the rate limiting of traffic from the wired network as it is passed to the VAP interface. You can set a maximum rate in kbytes per second. (Range: 100-12000 Kbytes per second;
Default: 100 Kbytes per second) A rogue AP is either an access point that is not authorized to participate in the wireless network, or an access point that does not have the correct security configuration. Rogue APs can allow unauthorized access to the network, or fool client stations into mistakenly associating with them and thereby blocking access to network resources. The access point can be configured to periodically scan all radio channels and find other access points within range. A database of nearby access points is maintained where any rogue APs can be identified. Rogue access points can be identified by unknown BSSID (MAC address). Rogue AP Detection 84 Chapter 6 | Wireless Settings Rogue AP Detection Figure 44: Rogue AP Detection The following items are displayed on this page:
AP Scan Setting Enables the periodic scanning for other nearby access points. (Default: Disable) Scan Interval Sets the time between each rogue AP scan. (Range: 15 -65535 seconds; Default: 7200 seconds) Scan Duration Sets the length of time for each rogue AP scan. A long scan duration time will detect more access points in the area, but causes more disruption to client access. (Range: 10 -150 milliseconds; Default: 150 milliseconds) First Scan Delay Delays the start of rogue AP scanning after enabling the feature or booting the AP. (Range: 0 -65535 seconds; Default: 65535 seconds) Friendly AP Allows you to enter the MAC address/Basic Service Set Identifier
(BSSID) of known APs in the network. These MAC addresses will be filtered out of the list of detected APs during a scan. Friendly AP MAC Table Displays the MAC addresses of known APs in the network. 85 Chapter 6 | Wireless Settings Wi-Fi Multimedia (WMM) Rogue AP Scan Result Displays information of unknown APs detected within the range of the AP running the scan. Friendly Active AP Scan Result Displays information of known APs detected within the range of the AP running the scan. Start Instant Scan Starts an immediate rogue AP scan on the radio interface. (Default: Disable) Note: While the access point scans a channel for rogue APs, wireless clients will not be able to connect to the access point. Therefore, avoid frequent scanning or scans of a long duration unless there is a reason to believe that more intensive scanning is required to find a rogue AP. Wi-Fi Multimedia (WMM) Wireless networks offer an equal opportunity for all devices to transmit data from any type of application. Although this is acceptable for most applications, multimedia applications (with audio and video) are particularly sensitive to the delay and throughput variations that result from this equal opportunity wireless access method. For multimedia applications to run well over a wireless network, a Quality of Service (QoS) mechanism is required to prioritize traffic types and provide an enhanced opportunity wireless access method. The access point implements QoS using the Wi-Fi Multimedia (WMM) standard. Using WMM, the access point is able to prioritize traffic and optimize performance when multiple applications compete for wireless network bandwidth at the same time. WMM employs techniques that are a subset of the IEEE 802.11e QoS standard and it enables the access point to interoperate with both WMM-enabled clients and other devices that may lack any WMM functionality. Access Categories WMM defines four access categories (ACs): voice, video, best effort, and background. These categories correspond to traffic priority levels and are mapped to IEEE 802.1D priority tags (see WMM Access Categories on page 87). The direct mapping of the four ACs to 802.1D priorities is specifically intended to facilitate inter operability with other wired network QoS policies. While the four ACs are specified for specific types of traffic, WMM allows the priority levels to be configured to match any network-wide QoS policy. WMM also specifies a protocol that access points can use to communicate the configured traffic priority levels to QoS-enabled wireless clients. 86 Chapter 6 | Wireless Settings Wi-Fi Multimedia (WMM) Table 2: WMM Access Categories Access Category WMM Designation Description AC_VO (AC3) Voice AC_VI (AC2) Video AC_BE (AC0) Best Effort Highest priority, minimum delay. Time-sensitive data such as VoIP (Voice over IP) calls. High priority, minimum delay. Time-sensitive data such as streaming video. Normal priority, medium delay and throughput. Data only affected by long delays. Data from applications or devices that lack QoS capabilities. AC_BK (AC1) Background Lowest priority. Data with no delay or throughput requirements, such as bulk data transfers. 802.1D Tags 7, 6 5, 4 0, 3 2, 1 WMM Operation WMM uses traffic priority based on the four ACs; Voice, Video, Best Effort, and Background. The higher the AC priority, the higher the probability that data is transmitted. When the access point forwards traffic, WMM adds data packets to four independent transmit queues, one for each AC, depending on the 802.1D priority tag of the packet. Data packets without a priority tag are always added to the Best Effort AC queue. From the four queues, an internal virtual collision resolution mechanism first selects data with the highest priority to be granted a transmit opportunity. Then the same collision resolution mechanism is used externally to determine which device has access to the wireless medium. For each AC queue, the collision resolution mechanism is dependent on two timing parameters:
AIFSN (Arbitration Inter-Frame Space Number), a number used to calculate the minimum time between data frames CW (Contention Window), a number used to calculate a random backoff time After a collision detection, a backoff wait time is calculated. The total wait time is the sum of a minimum wait time (Arbitration Inter-Frame Space, or AIFS) determined from the AIFSN, and a random backoff time calculated from a value selected from zero to the CW. The CW value varies within a configurable range. It starts at CWMin and doubles after every collision up to a maximum value, CWMax. After a successful transmission, the CW value is reset to its CWMin value. 87 Chapter 6 | Wireless Settings Wi-Fi Multimedia (WMM) Figure 45: WMM Backoff Wait Times CWMin CWMax High Priority AIFS Random Backoff Minimum Wait Time Random Wait Time Time Low Priority AIFS Random Backoff Minimum Wait Time Random Wait Time CWMin CWMax For high-priority traffic, the AIFSN and CW values are smaller. The smaller values equate to less backoff and wait time, and therefore more transmit opportunities. Figure 46: QoS 88 Chapter 6 | Wireless Settings Wi-Fi Multimedia (WMM) The following items are displayed on this page:
WMM Sets the WMM operational mode on the access point. When enabled, the parameters for each AC queue will be employed on the access point and QoS capabilities are advertised to WMM-enabled clients. (Default: Disabled) Disable: WMM is disabled. Enable: WMM must be supported on any device trying to associated with the access point. Devices that do not support this feature will not be allowed to associate with the access point. WMM Acknowledge Policy By default, all wireless data transmissions require the sender to wait for an acknowledgement from the receiver. WMM allows the acknowledgement wait time to be turned off for each Access Category (AC) 0-3. Although this increases data throughput, it can also result in a high number of errors when traffic levels are heavy. (Default: Acknowledge) Aknowledge Applies the WMM policy. No Aknowledge Ignores the WMM policy. WMM BSS Parameters These parameters apply to the wireless clients. WMM AP Parameters These parameters apply to the access point. logCWMin (Minimum Contention Window): The initial upper limit of the random backoff wait time before wireless medium access can be attempted. The initial wait time is a random value between zero and the CWMin value. Specify the CWMin value in the range 0-15 microseconds. Note that the CWMin value must be equal or less than the CWMax value. logCWMax (Maximum Contention Window): The maximum upper limit of the random backoff wait time before wireless medium access can be attempted. The contention window is doubled after each detected collision up to the CWMax value. Specify the CWMax value in the range 0-15 microseconds. Note that the CWMax value must be greater or equal to the CWMin value. AIFSN (Arbitration Inter-Frame Space): The minimum amount of wait time before the next data transmission attempt. Specify the AIFS value in the range 0-15 microseconds. TXOP Limit (Transmit Opportunity Limit): The maximum time an AC transmit queue has access to the wireless medium. When an AC queue is granted a transmit opportunity, it can transmit data for a time up to the TxOpLimit. This data bursting greatly improves the efficiency for high data-
rate traffic. Specify a value in the range 0-65535 microseconds. 89 Chapter 6 | Wireless Settings Wi-Fi Multimedia (WMM) Admission Control: The admission control mode for the access category. When enabled, clients are blocked from using the access category. (Default:
Disabled) Set WMM Applies the new parameters and saves them to RAM memory. Also prompts a screen to inform you when it has taken affect. Click OK to return to the home page. Changes will not be saved upon a reboot unless the running configuration file is saved. 90 7 Maintenance Settings Maintenance settings includes the following sections:
Upgrading Firmware on page 91 Running Configuration on page 93 Resetting the Access Point on page 94 Scheduled Reboot on page 95 Upgrading Firmware You can upgrade new access point software from a local file on the management workstation, or from an FTP or TFTP server. New software may be provided periodically from your distributor. After upgrading new software, you must reboot the access point to implement the new code. Until a reboot occurs, the access point will continue to run the software it was using before the upgrade started. Also note that new software that is incompatible with the current configuration automatically restores the access point to the factory default settings when first activated after a reboot. 91 Chapter 7 | Maintenance Settings Upgrading Firmware Figure 47: Firmware The following items are displayed on this page:
Firmware Version Displays the software image version that is being used as the runtime image. The Active image is the current running software, and the Backup image is the second software file installed on the AP, but not running. Next Boot Image Specifies what version of software will be used as a runtime image upon bootup. Set Next Boot Applies the runtime image setting. Local Downloads an operation code image file from the web management station to the access point using HTTP. Use the Browse button to locate the image file locally on the management station and click Start Upgrade to proceed. New Firmware File: Specifies the name of the code file on the server. The new firmware file name should not contain slashes (\ or /), the leading letter of the file name should not be a period (.), and the maximum length for file names is 32 characters for files on the access point. (Valid characters: A-Z, a-
z, 0-9, ., -, _) Remote Downloads an operation code image file from a specified remote FTP or TFTP server. After filling in the following fields, click Start Upgrade to proceed. 92 Chapter 7 | Maintenance Settings Running Configuration New Firmware File: Specifies the name of the code file on the server. The new firmware file name should not contain slashes (\ or /), the leading letter of the file name should not be a period (.), and the maximum length for file names on the FTP/TFTP server is 255 characters or 32 characters for files on the access point. (Valid characters: A-Z, a-z, 0-9, ., -, _) IP Address: IP address or host name of FTP or TFTP server. Username: The user ID used for login on an FTP server. Password: The password used for login on an FTP server. Start Upgrade Commences the upgrade process. Running Configuration A copy of a previous running configuration may be uploaded to the access point as a saved file from a remote location, or the current configuration saved and stored for restoration purposes at a later point. A configuration file may be saved or downloaded to/from a specified remote FTP or TFTP server. Figure 48: Running Configuration File 93 Chapter 7 | Maintenance Settings Resetting the Access Point The following items are displayed on this page:
File Backup/Restore Downloads an operation code image file from a specified remote FTP or TFTP server. After filling in the following fields, click Start Export/Import to proceed. Export/Import Select Export to upload a file to an FTP/TFTP server. Select Import to download a file from an FTP/TFTP server. Config file Specifies the name of the configuration file. A path on the server can be specified using / in the name, providing the path already exists; for example, myfolder/. Other than to indicate a path, the file name must not contain any slashes (\ or /), the leading letter cannot be a period (.), and the maximum length for file names on the FTP/TFTP server is 255 characters. (Valid characters: A-Z, a-z, 0-9, ., -, _) IP Address IP address or host name of FTP or TFTP server. Username The user ID used for login on an FTP server. Password The password used for login on an FTP server. Start Import/Export Initiates the selected backup or restore. Restore Factory Setting Click the Restore button to reset the configuration settings for the access point to the factory defaults and reboot the system. Note that all user configured information will be lost. You will have to re-enter the default user name and password to re-gain management access to this device. Restore Factory Setting with Keep IP Click the Restore button to reset the APs configuration settings, except for the IP, to the factory defaults and reboot the system. Note that other than the IP settings, all user configured information will be lost. You will have to re-enter the default user name and password to re-
gain management access to this device. Running Config To Startup Config Click Save to save the running configuration to the startup file. Resetting the Access Point The Reset page allows you to reset the access point and save the running configuration before the reboot. 94 Chapter 7 | Maintenance Settings Scheduled Reboot Figure 49: Resetting the Access Point The following items are displayed on this page:
Save Runtime config before Reboot Checking this option saves the current running configuration to the startup file. Reboot Click the Reboot button to reset the configuration settings for the AP and reboot the system. Note that all unsaved user configured information will be lost. Note: If you have upgraded system software, then you must reboot the access point to implement the new operation code. New software that is incompatible with the current configuration automatically restores the access point to default values when first activated after a reboot. Scheduled Reboot The Reboot Schedule page allows you to set the AP to reboot on a specified time schedule. The time can be either by days and hours, or a simple countdown in minutes. Figure 50: Reboot Schedule Fixed Time The following items are displayed on this page:
95 Chapter 7 | Maintenance Settings Scheduled Reboot Status Selects a fixed time interval or a countdown time, or disables the feature. Interval Specifies the interval in days. (Range: 1~7 days) Schedule Time Specifies a time in hours and minutes. (Range: 0~23 hours, 0~59 minutes) Figure 51: Reboot Schedule Countdown Time The following items are displayed on this page:
Status Selects a fixed time interval or a countdown time, or disables the feature. Countdown Time Specifies a time in minutes. (Default: 14400 minutes;
Range: 1~14400 minutes) 96 8 Status Information The Information menu displays information on the current system configuration, the wireless interface, the station status and system logs. Status Information includes the following sections:
AP Status on page 98 Station Status on page 101 Station Statistics on page 102 Event Logs on page 103 WDS Status on page 104 97 Chapter 8 | Status Information AP Status AP Status The AP Status window displays basic system configuration settings, as well as the settings for the wireless interfaces. AP System Configuration The AP System Configuration table displays the basic system configuration settings Figure 52: AP System Configuration The following items are displayed on this page:
Serial Number The serial number of the physical access point. System Up Time Length of time the management agent has been up. Ethernet MAC Address The physical layer address for the Ethernet port. Radio 0 MAC Address The base physical layer address of the 2.4 GHz interface. Radio 1 MAC Address The base physical layer address for the 5 GHz interface. 98 Chapter 8 | Status Information AP Status System Name Name assigned to this system. System Contact Administrator responsible for the system. IP Address IP address of the management interface for this device. IP Default Gateway IP address of the gateway router between this device and management stations that exist on other network segments. HTTP Server Status Shows if management access via HTTP is enabled. HTTP Port Shows the TCP port used by the HTTP interface. HTTPS Server Status Shows if management access via HTTPS is enabled. HTTPS Port Shows the TCP port used by the HTTPS interface. SSH Server Status Shows if management access via SSH is enabled. SSH Port Shows the TCP port used for SSH access. Telnet Server Status Shows if management access via Telnet is enabled. Telnet Port Shows the TCP port used for Telnet access. Software Version Shows the software version number. Boot Rom Version Show the boot software version number. Hardware Version Shows the units hardware version number. Part Number Shows the model number of the unit. Production Date Shows the production date of the unit. 99 Chapter 8 | Status Information AP Status AP Wireless Configuration The AP Wireless Configuration displays the VAP interface settings for the 2.4 GHz and 5 GHz radios. Figure 53: AP Wireless Configuration The following items are displayed on this page for the 2.4 GHz and 5 GHz radio interfaces:
VAP Displays the VAP number. SSID The service set identifier for the VAP interface. Status Displays the interface mode setting, either ap, wds-ap, or wds-sta. Association Mode Shows the basic security mode configured for the VAP. Encryption Method Displays the encryption method used on the interface. 802.1X Shows if IEEE 802.1X access control for wireless clients is enabled. MAC Address Displays the MAC address of the VAP interface. 100 Chapter 8 | Status Information Station Status Station Status The Station Status window shows the wireless clients currently associated with the 2.4 GHz and 5 GHz radio interfaces. Figure 54: Station Status The following items are displayed on this page:
Total Station Number of this device The total number of clients associated to the AP. Total Station Number of Radio 0 The total number of clients associated to the 2.4 GHz radio. Total Station Number of Radio 1 The total number of clients associated to the 5 GHz radio. Station Address The MAC address of the wireless client. RSSI The Receive Signal Strength Indicator for the wireless client. TxRate (Mbps) The data tranmit rate to the wireless client. RxRate (Mbps) The data receive rate from the wireless client. IP The IP address assigned to the wireless client. Privacy The data encryption method used by the wireless client. Authentication The authentication method used by the wireless client. Connection Time The time the wireless client has been associated. 101 Chapter 8 | Status Information Station Statistics Station Statistics The Station Statistics window shows the statistic information for wireless clients currently associated with the 2.4 GHz and 5 GHz radio interfaces. Figure 55: Station Statistics The following items are displayed on this page:
Station Address The MAC address of the wireless client. TxPkts The number of transmitted packets from this client. TxBytes The number of transmitted bytes from this client. RxPkts The number of received packets from this client. RxBytes The number of received bytes from this client. 102 Chapter 8 | Status Information Event Logs Event Logs The Event Logs window shows the log messages generated by the access point and stored in memory. Figure 56: Event Logs The following items are displayed on this page:
Display Event Log Selects the log entries to display. Up to 20 log messages can be displayed at one time. Each log entry includes the time the log message was generated, the logging level associated with the message, and the text of the log message. 103 Chapter 8 | Status Information WDS Status WDS Status The WDS Status window shows the WDS information for the 2.4 GHz and 5 GHz radio interfaces. Figure 57: WDS Status The following items are displayed on this page:
Auto Refresh Setting Enables the automatic refresh of WDS status information. When enabled, you can also set the time interval between each status refresh. WDS-STA Status The status of other APs in WDS-STA mode connected to the AP interfaces. Station Address The MAC address of the AP client. RSSI The Receive Signal Strength Indicator of the received signal sent from the peer WDS client. Remote RSSI The Receive Signal Strength Indicator of the AP signal received by the peer WDS-STA client. TxRate (Mbps) The data tranmit rate to the AP client. 104 Chapter 8 | Status Information WDS Status RxRate (Mbps) The data receive rate from the AP client. IP The IP address assigned to the AP client. Privacy The data encryption method used by the AP client. Authentication The authentication method used by the AP client. WDS-AP Status The status of other APs in WDS-AP mode connected to AP interfaces. Station Address The MAC address of the WDS-enabled AP. RSSI The Receive Signal Strength Indicator of the received signal sent from the peer WDS AP. Remote RSSI The Receive Signal Strength Indicator of the AP signal received by the peer WDS-AP. 105 Chapter 8 | Status Information WDS Status 106 Section III Command Line Interface This section provides a detailed description of the Command Line Interface, along with examples for all of the commands. This section includes these chapters:
Using the Command Line Interface on page 109 General Commands on page 115 System Management Commands on page 119 System Logging Commands on page 139 System Clock Commands on page 144 DHCP Relay Commands on page 149 SNMP Commands on page 151 Flash/File Commands on page 164 RADIUS Client Commands on page 167 802.1X Authentication Commands on page 173 MAC Address Authentication Commands on page 175 Filtering Commands on page 179 Spanning Tree Commands on page 185 WDS Bridge Commands on page 197 Ethernet Interface Commands on page 199 Wireless Interface Commands on page 206 107 Section III | Command Line Interface Wireless Security Commands on page 232 Rogue AP Detection Commands on page 241 Link Integrity Commands on page 247 Link Layer Discovery Commands on page 250 VLAN Commands on page 254 WMM Commands on page 258 QoS Commands on page 263 108 9 Using the Command Line Interface Console Connection When accessing the management interface for the over a direct connection to the console port, or via a Telnet connection, the access point can be managed by entering command keywords and parameters at the prompt. Using the access points command-line interface (CLI) is very similar to entering commands on a UNIX system. To access the AP through the console port, first set up a console connection to the AP. See Console Port Connection on page 19 for more information. At the console prompt, enter the user name and password. (The default user name is admin with no default password.) After the password is entered, the CLI displays the SMC# prompt. Example
(none) login: admin Password:
Jan 1 11:33:13 login[1918]: root login on 'ttyS0'
SMC#
Note: Command examples shown later in this chapter abbreviate the console prompt to AP for simplicity. Enter the necessary commands to complete your desired tasks. When finished, exit the session with the exit command. 109 Chapter 9 | Using the Command Line Interface Telnet Connection Telnet Connection Telnet operates over the IP transport protocol. In this environment, your management station and any network device you want to manage over the network must have a valid IP address. If the access point does not acquire an IP address from a DHCP server, the default IP address used by the access point is 192.168.2.10. To access the AP through a Telnet session, you must first set the IP address for the AP, and set the default gateway if you are managing the AP from a different IP subnet. For example:
AP#configure AP(config)#interface ethernet AP(if-ethernet)#ip address 10.1.0.1 255.255.255.0 10.1.0.254 AP(if-ethernet)#
After you configure the access point with an IP address, you can open a Telnet session by performing these steps. 1. From the remote host, enter the Telnet command and the IP address of the device you want to access. 2. At the prompt, enter the user name and system password. The CLI will display the AP# prompt to show that you are using executive access mode (that is, Exec).
(none) login: admin Password:
AP#
3. Enter the necessary commands to complete your desired tasks. 4. When finished, exit the session with the quit or exit command. Note: You can open up to four sessions to the device through Telnet. 110 Chapter 9 | Using the Command Line Interface Entering Commands Entering Commands This section describes how to enter CLI commands. Keywords and Arguments A CLI command is a series of keywords and arguments. Keywords identify a command, and arguments specify configuration parameters. For example, in the command show interfaces ethernet, show and interfaces are keywords, and ethernet is an argument that specifies the interface type. You can enter commands as follows:
To enter a simple command, enter the command keyword. To enter commands that require parameters, enter the required parameters after the command keyword. For example, to set a password for the administrator, enter:
AP(config)#password admin tpschris Minimum Abbreviation The CLI will accept a minimum number of characters that uniquely identify a command. For example, the command configure can be entered as con. If an entry is ambiguous, the system will prompt for further input. Command Completion If you terminate input with a Tab key, the CLI will print the remaining characters of a partial keyword up to the point of ambiguity. In the configure example, typing con followed by a tab will result in printing the command up to configure. Getting Help on Commands You can display a brief description of the help system by entering the help command. You can also display command syntax by following a command with the
? character to list keywords or parameters. Showing Commands If you enter a ? at the command prompt, the system will display the first level of keywords for the current configuration mode (Exec, Global Configuration, or Interface). You can also display a list of valid keywords for a specific command. For example, the command show ? displays a list of possible show commands:
AP# show ?
APmanagement Show management AP information. authentication Show Authentication parameters. bridge Show bridge. config Show current configuration. event-log Show event log on console. filters Show filters. firmware-image Show firmware images version. 111 Chapter 9 | Using the Command Line Interface Entering Commands interface Show interface information. line TTY line information. lldp Show lldp parameters. logging Show the logging buffers. long-distance Show the outdoor parameter information. radius Show radius server. rogue-ap Show Rogue AP information. snmp Show snmp configuration. sntp Show sntp configuration. station Show 802.11 station table. system Show system information. version Show system version. wds Show WDS service. AP: show The command show interface ? will display the following information:
AP# show interface ?
ethernet Show Ethernet interface wireless Show Wireless interface AP# show interface Negating the Effect of Commands For many configuration commands you can enter the prefix keyword no to cancel the effect of a command or reset the configuration to the default value. For example, the logging command will log system messages to a host server. To disable logging, specify the no logging command. This guide describes the negation effect for all applicable commands. Using Command History The CLI maintains a history of commands that have been entered. You can scroll back through the history of commands by pressing the up arrow key. Any command displayed in the history list can be executed again, or first modified and then executed. Understanding Command Modes The command set is divided into Exec and Configuration classes. Exec commands generally display information on system status or clear statistical counters. Configuration commands, on the other hand, modify interface parameters or enable certain functions. These classes are further divided into different modes. Available commands depend on the selected mode. You can always enter a question mark ? at the prompt to display a list of the commands available for the 112 Chapter 9 | Using the Command Line Interface Entering Commands current mode. The command classes and associated modes are displayed in the following table:
Table 3: Command Modes Class Exec Configuration Mode Privileged Global Interface-ethernet Interface-wireless Interface-wireless-vap Exec Commands When you open a new console session on an access point, the system enters Exec command mode. Only a limited number of the commands are available in this mode. You can access all other commands only from the configuration mode. To access Exec mode, open a new console session with the user name admin. The command prompt displays as AP# for Exec mode.
(none) login: admin Password: [system login password]
AP#
Configuration Commands Configuration commands are used to modify access point settings. These commands modify the running configuration and are saved in memory. The configuration commands are organized into four different modes:
Global Configuration (GC) - These commands modify the system level configuration, and include commands such as system name and password. Interface-Ethernet Configuration (IC-E) - These commands modify the Ethernet port configuration, and include command such as dns and ip. Interface-Wireless Configuration (IC-W) - These commands modify the wireless port configuration of global parameters for the radio, and include commands such as channel and beacon-interval. Interface-Wireless Virtual Access Point Configuration (IC-W-VAP) - These commands modify the wireless port configuration for each VAP, and include commands such as ssid and encryption. To enter the Global Configuration mode, enter the command configure in Exec mode. The system prompt will change to AP(config)# which gives you access privilege to all Global Configuration commands. 113 Chapter 9 | Using the Command Line Interface Entering Commands AP#configure AP(config)#
To enter Interface mode, you must enter the interface ethernet while in Global Configuration mode. The system prompt will change to AP(if-ethernet)#, or AP(if-wireless 0) indicating that you have access privileges to the associated commands. You can use the exit command to return to the Exec mode. AP(config)#interface ethernet AP(if-ethernet)#
Command Line Processing Commands are not case sensitive. You can abbreviate commands and parameters as long as they contain enough letters to differentiate them from any other currently available commands or parameters. You can use the Tab key to complete partial commands, or enter a partial command followed by the ? character to display a list of possible matches. 114 10 General Commands This chapter details general commands that apply to the CLI. Table 4: General Commands Command configure end exit Function Mode Page Activates global configuration mode Returns to previous configuration mode Exec GC, IC Returns to the previous configuration mode, or exits the CLI any cli-session-timeout Sets a timeout for CLI and Telnet sessions ping reset Sends ICMP echo request packets to another node on the network Restarts the system show line Shows the configuration settings for the console port Exec Exec Exec Exec 115 116 116 116 117 118 118 configure This command activates Global Configuration mode. You must enter this mode to modify most of the settings on the access point. You must also enter Global Configuration mode prior to enabling the context modes for Interface Configuration. See Using the Command Line Interface on page 109. Default Setting None Command Mode Exec Example AP#configure AP(config)#
Related Commands end 115 Chapter 10 | General Commands end This command returns to the previous configuration mode. Default Setting None Command Mode Global Configuration, Interface Configuration Example This example shows how to return to the Configuration mode from the Interface Configuration mode:
AP(if-ethernet)#end AP(config)#
exit This command returns to the Exec mode or exits the configuration program. Default Setting None Command Mode Any Example This example shows how to return to the Exec mode from the Interface Configuration mode, and then quit the CLI session:
AP(if-ethernet)#exit AP#exit
(none) login:
cli-session-timeout This command enables a timeout for console and Telnet sessions. Syntax cli-session-timeout <enable | disable | value>
enable - Enables the timeout. disable - Disables the timeout. value - Sets a time for the timeout (Range: 60~3600 seconds). Default Setting 120 seconds 116 Chapter 10 | General Commands Command Mode Exec Example The following example disables the CLI timeout. AP(config)# cli-session-timeout disable AP(config)#
ping This command sends ICMP echo request packets to another node on the network. Syntax ping <host_name | ip_address>
host_name - Alias of the host. ip_address - IP address of the host. Default Setting None Command Mode Exec Command Usage Use the ping command to see if another site on the network can be reached. The following are some results of the ping command:
Normal response - The normal response occurs in one to ten seconds, depending on network traffic. Destination does not respond - If the host does not respond, a timeout appears in ten seconds. Destination unreachable - The gateway for this destination indicates that the destination is unreachable. Network or host unreachable - The gateway found no corresponding entry in the route table. Example AP#ping 192.168.1.19 192.168.1.19 is alive AP#
117 Chapter 10 | General Commands reset This command restarts the system or restores the factory default settings. Syntax reset <board | configuration | configuration-keep-ip>
board - Reboots the system. configuration - Resets the configuration settings to the factory defaults, and then reboots the system. configuration-keep-ip - Resets the configuration settings to the factory defaults except for the IP address, and then reboots the system. Default Setting None Command Mode Exec Command Usage When the system is restarted, it will always run the Power-On Self-Test. Example This example shows how to reset the system:
AP#reset board Please wait a moment... show line This command displays the console ports configuration settings. Command Mode Exec Example The console port settings are fixed at the values shown below. AP#show line Console Line Information
databits : 8 parity : none speed : 115200 stop bits : 1
AP#
118 11 System Management Commands These commands are used to configure the password, system logs, browser management options, clock settings, and a variety of other system information. Table 5: System Management Commands Command Function Mode Page country prompt Sets the access point country code Exec Customizes the command line prompt system name Specifies the host name for the access point system-resource Sets rising and falling CPU and memory thresholds password Specifies the password for management access reboot-schedule Restarts the AP after a specified time apmgmtui ssh enable Enables the Secure Shell server apmgmtui ssh port Sets the Secure Shell port ip telnet-server enable Enables the Telnet server apmgmtip Specifies an IP address or range of addresses allowed access to management interfaces apmgmtui telnet-
server Enables Telnet management access apmgmtui snmp Enables SNMP management access apmgmtui http port Specifies the port to be used by the web browser interface apmgmtui http server Allows the access point to be monitored or configured from a browser apmgmtui http session-timeout apmgmtui https port apmgmtui https server Sets the web interface timeout Specifies the UDP port number used for a secure HTTP connection to the access points Web interface Enables the secure HTTP server on the access point GC GC GC GC GC GC GC GC GC GC GC GC GC GC GC GC show apmanagement Shows the AP management configuration show system Displays system information show system resource Displays CPU and memory usage information Exec Exec Exec 119 120 121 122 122 123 124 124 125 125 129 125 129 126 126 127 127 128 130 130 131 Chapter 11 | System Management Commands Table 5: System Management Commands (Continued) Command Function show version Displays version information for the system show config Displays detailed configuration information for the system Mode Page Exec Exec 132 132 country This command configures the access points country code, which identifies the country of operation and sets the authorized radio channels. Syntax country <country_code>
country_code - A two character code that identifies the country of operation. See the following table for a full list of codes. Table 6: Country Codes Code Country Code Country Code Country Code DO Kuwait KW Romania Country Albania Algeria Argentina Armenia Australia Austria Azerbaijan Bahrain Belarus Belgium Belize Bolivia Brazil Brunei Darussalam Bulgaria Canada Chile AL DZ AR AM AU AT AZ BH BY BE BZ BO BR BN BG CA CL Dominican Republic Ecuador Egypt Estonia Finland France Georgia Germany Greece Guatemala Honduras Hong Kong Hungary Iceland India Indonesia Iran Ireland 120 EC EG EE FI FR GE DE GR GT HN HK HU IS IN ID IR IE Latvia Lebanon Liechtenstein Lithuania Macao Macedonia Malaysia Malta Mexico Monaco Morocco Netherlands New Zealand Norway Qatar Oman LV LB LI LT MO MK MY MT MX MC MA NL NZ NO QA OM Russia Saudi Arabia Singapore Slovak Republic Spain Sweden Switzerland Syria Taiwan Thailand Trinidad &
Tobago Tunisia Turkey Ukraine United Arab Emirates United Kingdom RO RU SA SG SK ES SE CH SY TW TH TT TN TR UA AE GB Pakistan PK United States US Chapter 11 | System Management Commands Table 6: Country Codes (Continued) Country Code Country Code Country Code Country Code Uruguay Uzbekistan Yemen Venezuela Vietnam Zimbabwe UY UZ YE VE VN ZW China Colombia Costa Rica Croatia Cyprus Czech Republic Denmark Elsalvador CN CO CR HR CY CZ DK SV Israel Italy Japan Jordan Kazakhstan North Korea Korea Republic IL IT JP JO KZ KP KR Panama Peru Philippines Poland Portugal Puerto Rico Slovenia Luxembourg LU South Africa PA PE PH PL PT PR SI ZA Default Setting US - for units sold in the United States 99 (no country set) - for units sold in other countries Command Mode Exec Command Usage If you purchased an access point outside of the United States, the country code must be set before radio functions are enabled. The available Country Code settings can be displayed by using the country ?
command. Example AP#country tw AP#
prompt This command customizes the CLI prompt. Use the no form to restore the default prompt. Syntax prompt <string>
no prompt string - Any alphanumeric string to use for the CLI prompt.
(Maximum length: 32 characters) 121 Chapter 11 | System Management Commands Default Setting Enterprise AP Command Mode Global Configuration Example AP(config)#prompt RD2 RD2(config)#
system name This command specifies or modifies the system name for this device. Syntax system name <name>
name - The name of this host.
(Maximum length: 32 characters) Default Setting Enterprise AP Command Mode Global Configuration Example AP(config)#system name AP AP(config)#
system-resource This command sets CPU and memory rising and falling thresholds that monitor system resources. Syntax system-resource threshold <cpu-rising> <cpu-falling> <memory-rising>
<memory-falling> <interval>
threshold - Keyword that sets CPU and memory threshold values. cpu-rising - The CPU utilization rising threshold as a percentage.
(Range: 1-100 percent, 0 is disabled) cpu-falling - The CPU utilization falling threshold as a percentage.
(Range: 0 to less than the CPU rising threshold) memory-rising - The memory utilization rising threshold in Kbytes.
(Range: 1-113076 Kbytes, 0 is disabled) 122 Chapter 11 | System Management Commands memory-falling - The memory utilization falling threshold in Kbytes.
(Range: 0 to less than the memory rising threshold) interval - The utilization check interval in seconds.
(Range: 1 to 86400 seconds, 0 is disabled) Default Setting CPU Rising Threshold: 0 (disabled) CPU Falling Threshold: 20 percent Memory Rising Threshold: 0 (disabled) Memory Falling Threshold: 16000 Kbytes Threshold Interval: 0 (disabled) Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage When the CPU rising threshold is exceeded, a CPU Busy SNMP trap message is sent (only sent once). When the CPU utilization then drops below the falling threshold, a CPU Free trap message is sent . When the memory rising threshold is exceeded, a Memory Overload SNMP trap message is sent (only sent once). When the memory utilization then drops below the falling threshold, a Memory Free trap message is sent . Example AP(config)# system-resource threshold 80 20 100000 16000 20 AP(config)#
password After initially logging onto the system, you should set the access passwords. Remember to record them in a safe place. Syntax password <admin | guest> <old-password> <new-password>
admin - The keyword for the administrator password. guest - The keyword for the guest password old-password - The current password for management access. When there is no password set, enter the string null.
(Length: 5-32 characters, case sensitive) new-password - The new password for management access.
(Length: 5-32 characters, case sensitive) 123 Chapter 11 | System Management Commands Default Setting None. There are no admin or guest passwords. Command Mode Global Configuration Example AP(config)#password admin null tpschris AP(config)#
reboot-schedule This command restarts the system after a scheduled time. Syntax reboot-schedule {fixed-time <day><hour><minutes> | countdown
<minutes> | disable}
fixed-time - Reboots after a specified time in days, hours, and minutes. countdown - Reboots after a specified coundown time in minutes. disable - Disables the reboot schedule. Default Setting Disabled Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage When the system is restarted, it will always run the Power-On Self-Test. Example This example shows how to set a scheduled reboot time:
AP(config)# reboot-schedule fixed-time 1 2 3 AP(config)#
apmgmgtui ssh enable This command enables the Secure Shell server. Use the no form to disable the server. Syntax apmgmtui ssh enable no apmgmtui ssh-server 124 Chapter 11 | System Management Commands Default Setting Enabled Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage The access point supports Secure Shell version 2.0 only. After boot up, the SSH server needs about two minutes to generate host encryption keys. The SSH server is disabled while the keys are being generated. The show system command displays the status of the SSH server. Example AP(config)# apmgmtui ssh enable AP(config)#
apmgmtui ssh port This command sets the Secure Shell server port. Syntax apmgmtui ssh port <port-number>
port-number - The UDP port used by the SSH server.
(Range: 1-65535) Default Setting 22 Command Mode Global Configuration Example AP(config)# apmgmtui ssh port 1124 AP(config)#
apmgmtui telnet-
server enable This command enables the Telnet server. Use the no form to disable the server. Syntax apmgmtui telnet-server enable no apmgmtui telnet-server 125 Chapter 11 | System Management Commands Default Setting Interface enabled Command Mode Global Configuration Example AP(config)# apmgmtui telnet-server enable AP(config)#
apmgmtui http port This command specifies the TCP port number used by the web browser interface. Use the no form to use the default port. Syntax apmgmtui http port <port-number>
no apmgmtui http port port-number - The TCP port to be used by the browser interface. (Range: 80 or 1024-65535) Default Setting 80 Command Mode Global Configuration Example AP(config)# apmgmtui http port 769 AP(config) Related Commands apmgmtui http server apmgmtui http server This command allows this device to be monitored or configured from a web browser. Use the no form to disable this function. Syntax
[no] apmgmtui http server Default Setting Enabled 126 Chapter 11 | System Management Commands Command Mode Global Configuration Example AP(config)# apmgmtui http server AP(config)#
Related Commands apmgmtui http port apmgmtui http session-timeout This command sets the web browser timeout limit. Syntax apmgmtui http session-timeout <seconds>
seconds - The web session timeout. (Range: 0-1800 seconds, 0 means disabled) Default Setting 1800 seconds Command Mode Global Configuration Example AP(config)# apmgmtui http session-timeout 0 AP(config)#
Related Commands apmgmtui http server apmgmtui https port Use this command to specify the UDP port number used for HTTPS/SSL connection to the access points web interface. Use the no form to restore the default port. Syntax apmgmtui https port <port_number>
no apmgmtui https port port_number The UDP port used for HTTPS/SSL.
(Range: 443, 1024-65535) Default Setting 443 127 Chapter 11 | System Management Commands Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage You cannot configure the HTTP and HTTPS servers to use the same port. To avoid using common reserved TCP port numbers below 1024, the configurable range is restricted to 443 and between 1024 and 65535. If you change the HTTPS port number, clients attempting to connect to the HTTPS server must specify the port number in the URL, in this format: https://
device:port_number Example AP(config)# apmgmtui https port 1234 AP(config)#
apmgmtui https server Use this command to enable the secure hypertext transfer protocol (HTTPS) over the Secure Socket Layer (SSL), providing secure access (that is, an encrypted connection) to the access points web interface. Use the no form to disable this function. Syntax
[no] apmgmtui https server Default Setting Enabled Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage Both HTTP and HTTPS service can be enabled independently. If you enable HTTPS, you must indicate this in the URL:
https://device:port_number]
When you start HTTPS, the connection is established in this way:
The client authenticates the server using the servers digital certificate. The client and server negotiate a set of security protocols to use for the connection. The client and server generate session keys for encrypting and decrypting data. 128 Chapter 11 | System Management Commands The client and server establish a secure encrypted connection. A padlock icon should appear in the status bar for Internet Explorer. Example AP(config)# apmgmtui https server AP(config)#
apmgmtui snmp This command enables and disables SNMP management access to the AP. Syntax apmgmtui snmp [enable | disable]
enable - Enables SNMP management access. disable - Disables SNMP management access. Default Setting Enabled Command Mode Global Configuration Example AP(config)# apmgmtui snmp enable AP(config)#
apmgmtip This command specifies the client IP addresses that are allowed management access to the access point through various protocols. Note: Secure Web (HTTPS) connections are not affected by the UI Management or IP Management settings. Syntax apmgmtip [multiple <ip-address> <subnet-mask> | single <ip-address> | any]
multiple - Adds IP addresses within a specifiable range to the SNMP, web and Telnet groups. single - Adds an IP address to the SNMP, web and Telnet groups. any - Allows any IP address access through SNMP, web and Telnet groups. ip-address - Adds IP addresses to the SNMP, web and Telnet groups. 129 Chapter 11 | System Management Commands subnet-mask - Specifies a range of IP addresses allowed management access. Default Setting All addresses Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage If anyone tries to access a management interface on the access point from an invalid address, the unit will reject the connection, enter an event message in the system log, and send a trap message to the trap manager. Management access applies to SNMP, HTTP (web), Telnet, and SSH connections. Example This example restricts management access to the specified addresses. AP(config)#apmgmtip multiple 192.168.1.50 255.255.255.0 AP(config)#
show apmanagement This command shows the AP management configuration, including the IP addresses of management stations allowed to access the AP, and the protocols that are open to management access. Command Mode Exec Example AP#show apmanagement
AP Management IP Mode: static Telnet UI: Enable WEB UI : Enable SNMP UI : Enable
AP#
show system This command displays basic system configuration settings. Command Mode Exec 130 Chapter 11 | System Management Commands Example AP#show system System Information
Serial Number : AC25123456 System Up time : 1 min System Name : SMC2891W-AN System Location : where?
System Contact : who?
System Country Code : TW - Taiwan MAC Address : 70:72:CF:00:11:70 Radio 0 MAC Address : 70:72:CF:00:11:70 Radio 1 MAC Address : 70:72:CF:00:11:80 IP Address : 192.168.2.10 Subnet Mask : 255.255.255.0 Default Gateway : 192.168.2.254 Management IP : 192.168.1.10 Management Subnet : 255.255.255.0 IPv6 Address : 2001:db8::1 IPv6 Subnet Mask : 64 IPv6 Gateway : 2001:db8::2 VLAN Status : Disable Management VLAN ID(AP): 4093 Native VLAN ID(AP) : 1 DHCP Client : static HTTP Access : Enable HTTP Port : 80 HTTP Timeout : 1800 HTTPs Access : Enable HTTPs Port : 443 SSH Access : Enable SSH Port : 22 Telnet Access : Enable Telnet Port : 23 Slot Status : Dual band(a/g) Boot Rom Version : U-Boot 1.1.4 r1.4 Software Version : 0.3.3.4 Hardware Version : R0b Part Number :
Production Date : 2012/06/01 User Name : admin Reboot scheduling : disable
AP#
show system resource This command displays CPU and memory usage information for the system. Command Mode Exec Example AP#show system resource
=============== CPU =========================================
user (%) 0.00 nice (%) 0.00 system (%) 7.92 131 Chapter 11 | System Management Commands iowait (%) 0.00 idle (%) 92.08
=============== Memory ======================================
free (kb) 95820 used (kb) 17256 used (%) 15.26 cached (kb) 4900
AP#
show version This command displays the software version for the system. Command Mode Exec Example AP#show version Boot Rom Version : U-Boot 1.1.4 r1.4 Software Version : 0.3.3.4 Hardware Version : R0b AP#
show config This command displays detailed configuration information for the system. Command Mode Exec Example AP#show config System Information
Serial Number : AC25123456 System Up time : 1 min System Name : SMC2891W-AN System Location : where?
System Contact : who?
System Country Code : TW - Taiwan MAC Address : 70:72:CF:00:11:70 Radio 0 MAC Address : 70:72:CF:00:11:70 Radio 1 MAC Address : 70:72:CF:00:11:80 IP Address : 192.168.2.10 Subnet Mask : 255.255.255.0 Default Gateway : 192.168.2.254 Management IP : 192.168.1.10 Management Subnet : 255.255.255.0 IPv6 Address : 2001:db8::1 IPv6 Subnet Mask : 64 IPv6 Gateway : 2001:db8::2 VLAN Status : Disable Management VLAN ID(AP): 4093 Native VLAN ID(AP) : 1 DHCP Client : static 132 Chapter 11 | System Management Commands HTTP Access : Enable HTTP Port : 80 HTTP Timeout : 1800 HTTPs Access : Enable HTTPs Port : 443 SSH Access : Enable SSH Port : 22 Telnet Access : Enable Telnet Port : 23 Slot Status : Dual band(a/g) Boot Rom Version : U-Boot 1.1.4 r1.4 Software Version : 0.3.3.4 Hardware Version : R0b Part Number :
Production Date : 2012/06/01 User Name : admin Reboot scheduling : disable
SVP Information
SVP: Enabled
SNTP Information
Service State : ENABLED SNTP (server 1) IP : 129.6.15.28 SNTP (server 2) IP : 132.163.4.101 Current Time : Thu Jan 1 08:07:56 CST 1970 Time Zone : (GMT+08) Taiwan : Taipei Daylight Saving : DISABLED Daylight Saving Time : From MAR, Fourth Week, Wednesday To NOV, Last Week, Sunday
SNMP Information
Service State : Enable Community (ro) : *******
Community (rw) : ********
Location : where?
Contact : who?
Trap Destination List:
There is no SNMP Trap Host.
Trap Configuration:
systemUp: Disabled systemDown: Disabled
View List:
There is no view.
Group List:
133 Chapter 11 | System Management Commands There is no group.
User List:
There is no SNMPv3 User.
Target List:
There is no SNMP target.
Filter List:
There is no notification filter.
Bridge STP Information
Bridge MAC : 70:72:CF:00:11:70 Status : Disabled priority : 32768 Hello Time : 2 seconds Maximum Age : 20 seconds Forward Delay : 15 seconds
Bridge Aging Time Information
Aging time: 20
Logging Information
Syslog State : DISABLE Logging Console State : DISABLE Logging Level : Debug Servers 1: 10.7.16.98, UDP Port: 514, State: DISABLE 2: 10.7.13.48, UDP Port: 514, State: DISABLE 3: 10.7.123.123, UDP Port: 514, State: DISABLE 4: 10.7.13.77, UDP Port: 514, State: DISABLE
Protocol Filter Information
Local Bridge :DISABLED access-limitation :DISABLED dhcp :DISABLED EtherType Filter :DISABLED Enabled EtherType Filters
ACL Information
Source Filter :DISABLED Source MAC :
ACL Information
134 Chapter 11 | System Management Commands Destination Filter :DISABLED Destination MAC :
Console Line Information
databits : 8 parity : none speed : 115200 stop bits : 1
Ethernet Interface Information
IP Address : 192.168.2.10 Subnet Mask : 255.255.255.0 Default Gateway : 192.168.2.254 Primary DNS :
Secondary DNS :
IPv6 Address : 2001:db8::1 IPv6 Subnet Mask : 64 IPv6 Gateway : 2001:db8::2 IPv6 Primary DNS :
IPv6 Secondary DNS :
Admin status : Up Operational status : Up
-------------------------------Basic Setting-------------------------------
SSID : EAP9112A_11BGN_0 Wireless Network Mode : 11ng Auto Channel Select : DISABLE Channel : 6 High Throughput Mode : HT20 Allowed Rates :
1,2,5.5,6,9,11,12,18,24,36,48,54,MCS0,MCS1,MCS2,MCS3,MCS4,MCS5,MCS6,MCS7,MC S8,MCS9,MCS10,MCS11,MCS12,MCS13,MCS14,MCS15 Status : ENABLE MAC Address : 70:72:CF:00:11:70 VLAN-ID : 1 Dhcp-Relay Server Ip : 0.0.0.0
---------------------------------Capacity----------------------------------
Maximum Association Client Per Vap : 16 Clients Maximum Association Client Per Radio : 127 Clients
-----------------------------802.11 Parameters-----------------------------
Transmit Power : 100%(Tx dBm) Preamble Length : Short-or-Long Fragmentation Threshold : 2346 RTS Threshold : 2346 Beacon Interval : 100 Authentication Timeout Interval : 3 Mins Association Timeout Interval : 5 Mins DTIM Interval : 1 Short Guard Interval Status : Disabled A-MPDU Status : Enabled A-MPDU Length Limit : 65535 Bytes A-MSDU Status : Enabled Disable HT20/H40 coexistence : n
---------------------------------Security----------------------------------
Closed System : DISABLE WPA Function : OPEN-SYSTEM, WPA FUNCTION DISABLE 135 Chapter 11 | System Management Commands WPA PSK Key Type : ascii WPA PSK Key : ********
Default Transmit Key : 1 Static WEP Keys Key 1 : *****
Key 2 : *****
Key 3 : *****
Key 4 : *****
Pre-Authentication : DISABLE
----------------------------------802.1x-----------------------------------
802.1x : DISABLE 802.1x Reauthentication Time Value : 3600 seconds
--------------------Bandwidth Control for Uplink/Downlink------------------
Bandwidth Control for Uplink : DISABLE Bandwidth Control for Uplink rate : 100 Kbyte/s Bandwidth Control for Downlink : DISABLE Bandwidth Control for Downlink rate : 100 Kbyte/s
-------------------------------Qos Mapping-------------------------------
Qos Mapping for vap to 802.1p : DISABLE User Priority for vap to 802.1p : 0 Qos Mapping for 802.1d to 802.1p : DISABLE Template Name for 802.1d to 802.1p : default_up_mapping_1 Template Priority for 802.1d to 802.1p : 01234567 Qos Mapping for 802.1d to DSCP : DISABLE Template Name for 802.1d to DSCP : default_up_mapping_1 Template Priority for 802.1d to DSCP : 01234567
-----------------------------Quality of Service----------------------------
WMM Mode : ENABLED WMM Acknowledge Policy AC0(BE) : Acknowledge AC1(BK) : Acknowledge AC2(VI) : Acknowledge AC3(VO) : Acknowledge WMM AP Parameters:
AC0(BE) CwMin: 4 CwMax: 6 AIFSN: 3 TXOP Limit: 0 AC1(BK) CwMin: 4 CwMax: 10 AIFSN: 7 TXOP Limit: 0 AC2(VI) CwMin: 3 CwMax: 4 AIFSN: 1 TXOP Limit:3008 AC3(VO) CwMin: 2 CwMax: 3 AIFSN: 1 TXOP Limit:1504 WMM BSS Parameters:
AC0(BE) CwMin: 4 CwMax: 10 AIFSN: 3 TXOP Limit: 0 ACM:Disabled AC1(BK) CwMin: 4 CwMax: 10 AIFSN: 7 TXOP Limit: 0 ACM:Disabled AC2(VI) CwMin: 3 CwMax: 4 AIFSN: 2 TXOP Limit:3008 ACM:Disabled AC3(VO) CwMin: 2 CwMax: 3 AIFSN: 2 TXOP Limit:1504 ACM:Disabled
-------------------------------Basic Setting-------------------------------
SSID : SMC2891W-AN_11NA_0 Wireless Network Mode : 11na Auto Channel Select : DISABLE Channel : 56 High Throughput Mode : HT20 Allowed Rates :
1,2,5.5,6,9,11,12,18,24,36,48,54,MCS0,MCS1,MCS2,MCS3,MCS4,MCS5,MCS6,MCS7,MC S8,MCS9,MCS10,MCS11,MCS12,MCS13,MCS14,MCS15 Status : ENABLE MAC Address : 70:72:CF:00:11:80 VLAN-ID : 1 Dhcp-Relay Server Ip : 0.0.0.0
---------------------------------Capacity----------------------------------
Maximum Association Client Per Vap : 16 Clients 136 Chapter 11 | System Management Commands Maximum Association Client Per Radio : 127 Clients
-----------------------------802.11 Parameters-----------------------------
Transmit Power : 100%(Tx dBm) Fragmentation Threshold : 2346 RTS Threshold : 2346 Beacon Interval : 100 Authentication Timeout Interval : 3 Mins Association Timeout Interval : 5 Mins DTIM Interval : 1 Short Guard Interval Status : Disabled A-MPDU Status : Enabled A-MPDU Length Limit : 65535 Bytes A-MSDU Status : Enabled Disable HT20/H40 coexistence : n
---------------------------------Security----------------------------------
Closed System : DISABLE WPA Function : OPEN-SYSTEM, WPA FUNCTION DISABLE WPA PSK Key Type : ascii WPA PSK Key : ********
Default Transmit Key : 1 Static WEP Keys Key 1 : *****
Key 2 : *****
Key 3 : *****
Key 4 : *****
Pre-Authentication : DISABLE
----------------------------------802.1x-----------------------------------
802.1x : DISABLE 802.1x Reauthentication Time Value : 3600 seconds
-------------------Bandwidth Control for Uplink/Downlink-------------------
Bandwidth Control for Uplink : DISABLE Bandwidth Control for Uplink rate : 100 Kbyte/s Bandwidth Control for Downlink : DISABLE Bandwidth Control for Downlink rate : 100 Kbyte/s
-------------------------------Qos Mapping-------------------------------
Qos Mapping for vap to 802.1p : DISABLE User Priority for vap to 802.1p : 0 Qos Mapping for 802.1d to 802.1p : DISABLE Template Name for 802.1d to 802.1p : default_up_mapping_1 Template Priority for 802.1d to 802.1p : 01234567 Qos Mapping for 802.1d to DSCP : DISABLE Template Name for 802.1d to DSCP : default_up_mapping_1 Template Priority for 802.1d to DSCP : 01234567
-----------------------------Quality of Service----------------------------
WMM Mode : ENABLED WMM Acknowledge Policy AC0(BE) : Acknowledge AC1(BK) : Acknowledge AC2(VI) : Acknowledge AC3(VO) : Acknowledge WMM AP Parameters:
AC0(BE) CwMin: 4 CwMax: 6 AIFSN: 3 TXOP Limit: 0 AC1(BK) CwMin: 4 CwMax: 10 AIFSN: 7 TXOP Limit: 0 AC2(VI) CwMin: 3 CwMax: 4 AIFSN: 1 TXOP Limit:3008 AC3(VO) CwMin: 2 CwMax: 3 AIFSN: 1 TXOP Limit:1504 WMM BSS Parameters:
137 Chapter 11 | System Management Commands AC0(BE) CwMin: 4 CwMax: 10 AIFSN: 3 TXOP Limit: 0 ACM:Disabled AC1(BK) CwMin: 4 CwMax: 10 AIFSN: 7 TXOP Limit: 0 ACM:Disabled AC2(VI) CwMin: 3 CwMax: 4 AIFSN: 2 TXOP Limit:3008 ACM:Disabled AC3(VO) CwMin: 2 CwMax: 3 AIFSN: 2 TXOP Limit:1504 ACM:Disabled LLDP Information
Status :Disabled Message Transmission Hold Time :4 Message Transmission Interval (seconds) :30 Reinitial Delay Time (seconds) :2 Transmission Delay Value (seconds) :2
Radius Accounting Information
Status : DISABLED IP : 10.7.16.96 Shared Secret : ********
Port : 1813 timeout-interim : 300
Radius Primary Server Information
Status : ENABLED IP : 10.7.16.96 Port : 1812 Shared Secret : ********
Radius Secondary Server Information
Status : ENABLED IP : 10.7.16.96 Port : 1812 Shared Secret : ***
AP#
138 12 System Logging Commands These commands are used to configure system logging on the access point. Table 7: System Management Commands Command logging on logging host Function Controls logging of error messages Adds a syslog server host IP address that will receive logging messages logging console Initiates logging of error messages to the console logging level Defines the minimum severity level for event logging logging clear Clears all log entries in access point memory show logging Displays the state of logging show event-log Displays all log entries in access point memory Mode Page GC GC GC GC GC Exec Exec 139 140 140 141 141 142 142 logging on This command controls logging of error messages; i.e., sending debug or error messages to memory. The no form disables the logging process. Syntax
[no] logging on Default Setting Disabled Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage The logging process controls error messages saved to memory. You can use the logging level command to control the type of error messages that are stored in memory. Example AP(config)#logging on AP(config)#
139 Chapter 12 | System Logging Commands logging host This command specifies syslog servers host that will receive logging messages. Use the no form to remove syslog server host. Syntax logging host <1 | 2 | 3 | 4> <host_name | host_ip_address> [udp_port]
no logging host <1 | 2 | 3 | 4>
1 - First syslog server. 2 - Second syslog server. 3 - Third syslog server. 4 - Fourth syslog server. host_name - The name of a syslog server. (Range: 1-20 characters) host_ip_address - The IP address of a syslog server. udp_port - The UDP port used by the syslog server. Default Setting None Command Mode Global Configuration Example AP(config)#logging host 1 10.1.0.3 AP(config)#
logging console This command initiates logging of error messages to the console. Use the no form to disable logging to the console. Syntax
[no] logging console Default Setting Disabled Command Mode Global Configuration Example AP(config)#logging console AP(config)#
140 Chapter 12 | System Logging Commands logging level This command sets the minimum severity level for event logging. Syntax logging level <Emergency | Alert | Critical | Error | Warning | Notice |
Informational | Debug>
Default Setting Informational Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage Messages sent include the selected level down to Emergency level. Table 8: Logging Levels Level Argument Description Emergency System unusable Alert Critical Error Warning Notice Immediate action needed Critical conditions (e.g., memory allocation, or free memory error -
resource exhausted) Error conditions (e.g., invalid input, default used) Warning conditions (e.g., return false, unexpected return) Normal but significant condition, such as cold start Informational Informational messages only Debug Debugging messages Example AP(config)#logging level alert AP(config)#
logging clear This command clears all log messages stored in the access points memory. Syntax logging clear Command Mode Global Configuration 141 Chapter 12 | System Logging Commands Example AP(config)#logging clear AP(config)#
show logging This command displays the logging configuration. Syntax show logging Command Mode Exec Example AP#show logging Logging Information
Syslog State : ENABLE Logging Console State : DISABLE Logging Level : Debug Servers 1: 10.7.16.98, UDP Port: 514, State: DISABLE 2: 10.7.13.48, UDP Port: 514, State: DISABLE 3: 10.7.123.123, UDP Port: 65535, State: DISABLE 4: 10.7.13.77, UDP Port: 5432, State: DISABLE
AP#
show event-log This command displays log messages stored in the access points memory. Syntax show event-log Command Mode Exec Example AP#show event-log Jan 1 05:45:50 (none) <6>user.info kernel: ar5416Reset Setting CFG 0x10a Jan 1 05:45:50 (none) <6>user.info kernel: Howl Revision ID 0xb9 Jan 1 05:45:50 (none) <6>user.info kernel: ar5416Reset Setting CFG 0x10a Jan 1 05:45:50 (none) <6>user.info kernel: Howl Revision ID 0xb9 Jan 1 05:45:50 (none) <6>user.info kernel: MBSSID Set bit 22 of AR_STA_ID 0xb8c1817b Jan 1 05:45:50 (none) <6>user.info kernel: Force rf_pwd_icsyndiv to 2 on 2462
(1 0) 142 Chapter 12 | System Logging Commands AP#
143 13 System Clock Commands These commands are used to configure SNTP and system clock settings on the access point. Table 9: System Clock Commands Command sntp-server ip Function Mode Page Specifies one or more time servers sntp-server enabled Accepts time from the specified time servers sntp-server date-time Manually sets the system date and time sntp-server daylight-saving Sets the start and end dates for daylight savings time sntp-server timezone Sets the time zone for the access points internal clock show sntp Shows current SNTP configuration settings Exec GC GC GC GC GC 144 145 145 146 147 147 sntp-server ip This command sets the IP address of the servers to which SNTP time requests are issued. Use the this command with no arguments to clear all time servers from the current list. Syntax sntp-server ip <1 | 2> <ip>
1 - First time server. 2 - Second time server. ip - IP address of an time server (NTP or SNTP). Default Setting 129.6.15.28 132.163.4.101 Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage When SNTP client mode is enabled using the sntp-server enabled command, the sntp-server ip command specifies the time servers from which the access point polls for time updates. The access point will poll the time servers in the order specified until a response is received. 144 Chapter 13 | System Clock Commands Example AP(config)#sntp-server ip 1 10.1.0.19 AP#
Related Commands sntp-server enabled show sntp sntp-server enabled This command enables SNTP client requests for time synchronization with NTP or SNTP time servers specified by the sntp-server ip command. Use the no form to disable SNTP client requests. Syntax
[no] sntp-server enabled Default Setting Enabled Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage The time acquired from time servers is used to record accurate dates and times for log events. Without SNTP, the access point only records the time starting from the factory default set at the last bootup (i.e., 00:14:00, January 1, 1970). Example AP(config)#sntp-server enabled AP(config)#
Related Commands sntp-server ip show sntp sntp-server date-time This command sets the system clock. Syntax sntp-server <year> <month> <day> <hour> <minute>
year - Sets the year. (Range: 1970-2100) month - Sets the month. (Range: 1-12) day - Sets the day. (Range: 1-31) 145 Chapter 13 | System Clock Commands hour - Sets the hour. (Range: 0-23) minute - Sets the minute. (Range: 0-59) Default Setting 00:14:00, January 1, 1970 Command Mode Global Configuration Example This example sets the system clock to 12:10 April 27, 2009. AP(config)# sntp-server date-time 2009 4 27 12 10 AP(config)#
Related Commands sntp-server enabled sntp-server daylight-
saving This command sets the start and end dates for daylight savings time. Use the no form to disable daylight savings time. Syntax sntp-server daylight-saving [date-week <start-month> <start-week> <start-
day> <end-month> <end-week> <end-day>]
no sntp-server daylight-saving date-week - The key word to set the date on which to start and end the daylight-saving time. start-month - Sets the start month. (Range: 1-12) start-week - Sets the start week. (Range: 1-5) start-day - Sets the start day. (Range: 0-6, where 0 is Sunday) end-month - Sets the end month. (Range: 1-12) end-week - Sets the end week. (Range: 1-5) end-day - Sets the end day. (Range: 0-6, where 0 is Sunday) Default Setting Disabled Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage The command sets the system clock back one hour during the specified period. 146 Chapter 13 | System Clock Commands Using the command without setting the start and end date enables the daylight-saving feature. Example This sets daylight savings time to be used from the Sunday in the fourth week of April, to the Sunday in the fourth week of October. AP(config)# sntp-server daylight-saving date-week 4 4 0 10 4 0 AP(config)#
sntp-server timezone This command sets the time zone for the access points internal clock. Syntax sntp-server timezone <hours>
hours - Number of hours before/after UTC.
(Range: -12 to +12 hours) Default Setting
+08 hours (Hong Kong, Perth, Singapore, Taipei) Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage This command sets the local time zone relative to the Coordinated Universal Time
(UTC, formerly Greenwich Mean Time or GMT), based on the earths prime meridian, zero degrees longitude. To display a time corresponding to your local time, you must indicate the number of hours and minutes your time zone is east (before) or west (after) of UTC. Example AP(config)#sntp-server timezone +8 AP(config)#
show sntp This command displays the current time and configuration settings for the SNTP client. Command Mode Exec Example AP#show sntp 147 Chapter 13 | System Clock Commands SNTP Information
Service State : ENABLED SNTP (server 1) IP : 129.6.15.28 SNTP (server 2) IP : 132.163.4.101 Current Time : Mon Apr 27 13:39:23 UTC 2009 Time Zone : (GMT+08) Hong Kong, Perth, Singapore, Taipei Daylight Saving : DISABLED Daylight Saving Time : From MAR, Fourth Week, Wednesday To NOV, Last Week, Sunday
AP#
148 14 DHCP Relay Commands Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) can dynamically allocate an IP address and other configuration information to network clients that broadcast a request. To receive the broadcast request, the DHCP server would normally have to be on the same subnet as the client. However, when the access points DHCP relay agent is enabled, received client requests can be forwarded directly by the access point to a known DHCP server on another subnet. Responses from the DHCP server are returned to the access point, which then broadcasts them back to clients. Table 10: DHCP Relay Commands Command Function Mode Page dhcp-relay server Sets the DHCP server address and enables the DHCP relay agent IC-W-
VAP 149 dhcp-relay server This command configures the DHCP server address and enables the DHCP relay agent. Syntax dhcp-relay server <ip_address>
ip_address - IP address of the DHCP server. Default Setting 0.0.0.0 (disabled) Command Mode Interface Configuration (Wireless-VAP) Command Usage For the DHCP relay agent to function, the DHCP server IP address must be configured. The default IP address 0.0.0.0 disables the DHCP relay agent. To view the DHCP relay status, use the show interface wireless command. Example AP(if-wireless 0: VAP[0])# dhcp-relay server 192.168.1.10 AP(if-wireless 0: VAP[0])#
149 Chapter 14 | DHCP Relay Commands Related Commands show interface wireless 150 15 SNMP Commands Controls access to this access point from management stations using the Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP), as well as the hosts that will receive trap messages. Table 11: SNMP Commands Command Function snmp-server community Sets up the community access string to permit access to SNMP commands snmp-server contact Sets the system contact string snmp-server location Sets the system location string snmp-server enable server Enables SNMP service and traps snmp-server host Specifies the recipient of an SNMP notification operation snmp-server trap Enables specific SNMP notifications snmp-server vacm view Configures the VACM view snmp-server vacm group Configures the VACM group snmp-server user Sets the name of the SNMP v3 user snmp-server target Configures SNMP v3 notification targets snmp-server filter Configures SNMP v3 notification filters show snmp vacm group Displays the VACM group show snmp vacm view Displays VACM views show snmp users Displays SNMP v3 user settings show snmp target Displays the SNMP v3 notification targets show snmp filter Displays the SNMP v3 notification filters Mode GC GC GC GC GC GC GC GC GC GC GC Exec Exec Exec Exec Exec show snmp Displays the status of SNMP communications Exec Page 152 152 153 153 154 155 155 156 157 158 159 163 162 160 160 161 161 151 Chapter 15 | SNMP Commands snmp-server community This command defines the community access string for the Simple Network Management Protocol. Use the no form to remove the specified community string. Syntax snmp-server community string [ro | rw]
no snmp-server community string string - Community string that acts like a password and permits access to the SNMP protocol. (Maximum length: 23 characters, case sensitive) ro - Specifies read-only access. Authorized management stations are only able to retrieve MIB objects. rw - Specifies read/write access. Authorized management stations are able to both retrieve and modify MIB objects. Default Setting public - Read-only access. Authorized management stations are only able to retrieve MIB objects. private - Read/write access. Authorized management stations are able to both retrieve and modify MIB objects. Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage If you enter a community string without the ro or rw option, the default is read only. Example AP(config)#snmp-server community alpha rw AP(config)#
snmp-server contact This command sets the system contact string. Use the no form to remove the system contact information. Syntax snmp-server contact string no snmp-server contact string - String that describes the system contact. (Maximum length: 255 characters) Default Setting None 152 Chapter 15 | SNMP Commands Command Mode Global Configuration Example AP(config)#snmp-server contact Paul AP(config)#
Related Commands snmp-server location snmp-server location This command sets the system location string. Use the no form to remove the location string. Syntax snmp-server location <text>
no snmp-server location text - String that describes the system location.
(Maximum length: 255 characters) Default Setting None Command Mode Global Configuration Example AP(config)#snmp-server location WC-19 AP(config)#
Related Commands snmp-server contact snmp-server enable server This command enables SNMP management access and also enables this device to send SNMP traps (i.e., notifications). Use the no form to disable SNMP service and trap messages. Syntax
[no] snmp-server enable server Default Setting Enabled 153 Chapter 15 | SNMP Commands Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage This command enables both authentication failure notifications and link-up-
down notifications. The snmp-server host command specifies the host device that will receive SNMP notifications. Example AP(config)#snmp-server enable server AP(config)#
Related Commands snmp-server host snmp-server host This command specifies the recipient of an SNMP notification. Use the no form to remove the specified host. Syntax snmp-server host <host_ip_address> <community-string>
no snmp-server host host_ip_address - IP of the host (the targeted recipient). community-string - Password-like community string sent with the notification operation. (Maximum length: 23 characters) Default Setting None Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage The snmp-server host command is used in conjunction with the snmp-server enable server command to enable SNMP notifications. You can configure up to four host IP addresses. A separate snmp-server host command must be entered for each host. Although you can set the community string using the snmp-server host command by itself, it is recommended that you define this string using the snmp-server community command prior to using the snmp-server host command. 154 Chapter 15 | SNMP Commands Example AP(config)#snmp-server host 1 10.1.19.23 batman AP(config)#
Related Commands snmp-server enable server snmp-server trap This command enables the access point to send specific SNMP traps
(i.e., notifications). Use the no form to disable specific trap messages. Syntax snmp-server trap <trap>
no snmp-server trap <trap>
trap - One of the following SNMP trap messages:
sysSystemDown - The access point is about to shutdown and reboot. sysSystemUp - The access point is up and running. Default Setting All traps enabled Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage This command is used in conjunction with the snmp-server host and snmp-
server enable server commands to enable SNMP notifications. Example AP(config)#no snmp-server trap syssystemup AP(config)#
snmp-server vacm view This command configures SNMP v3 views. Use the no form to delete an SNMP v3 view or remove a subtree from a filter. Syntax snmp-server vacm view <name> [included | excluded] <subtree> [mask
<mask>]
no snmp-server vacm view <name> [included | excluded] <subtree>
name - A user-defined name that identifies an SNMP v3 view. (Maximum length: 32 characters) 155 Chapter 15 | SNMP Commands include - Defines a filter type that includes objects in the MIB subtree. exclude - Defines a filter type that excludes objects in the MIB subtree. subtree - The part of the MIB subtree that is to be filtered. mask - An optional hexadecimal value bit mask to define objects in the MIB subtree. Default Setting None Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage The access point allows multiple notification filters to be created. Each filter can be defined by up to 20 MIB subtree ID entries. Use the command more than once with the same filter ID to build a filter that includes or excludes multiple MIB objects. Note that the filter entries are applied in the sequence that they are defined. The MIB subtree must be defined in the form .1.3.6.1 and always start with a .. The mask is a hexadecimal value with each bit masking the corresponding ID in the MIB subtree. A 1 in the mask indicates an exact match and a 0 indicates a wild card. For example, a mask value of 0xFFBF provides a bit mask 1111 1111 1011 1111. If applied to the subtree 1.3.6.1.2.1.2.2.1.1.23, the zero corresponds to the 10th subtree ID. When there are more subtree IDs than bits in the mask, the mask is padded with ones. Example AP(config)#snmp-server vacm view testview include .1 AP(config)#snmp-server vacm view testview exclude .1.3.6.1.2.1.2.2.1.1.23 snmp-server vacm group This command configures SNMP v3 groups. Use the no form to delete an SNMP v3 group. Syntax snmp-server vacm group <name> {security-level <level>} <read-view>
<write-view>
no snmp-server vacm group <name>
name - A user-defined name that identifies an SNMP v3 group. (Maximum length: 32 characters) 156 Chapter 15 | SNMP Commands level - The SNMPv3 security level of the group. One of the following:
NoAuthNoPriv - A group using no authentication and no data encryption. Users in this group use no security, either authentication or encryption, in SNMP messages they send to the agent. AuthNoPriv - A group using authentication, but no data encryption. Users in this group send SNMP messages that use an MD5 key/
password for authentication, but not a DES key/password for encryption. AuthPriv - A group using authentication and data encryption. Users in this group send SNMP messages that use an MD5 key/password for authentication and a DES key/password for encryption. read-view - The name of a defined SNMPv3 view for read access. write-view - The name of a defined SNMPv3 view for write access. Default Setting None Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage The access point allows multiple groups to be created. A group sets the access policy for the assigned users. When authentication is selected, the MD5 algorithm is used as specified in the snmp-server user command. When privacy is selected, the DES algorithm is used for data encryption. Example AP(config)#snmp-server vacm group testgroup security-level authpriv rdview wrview AP(config)#
snmp-server user This command configures the SNMP v3 users that are allowed to manage the access point. Use the no form to delete an SNMP v3 user. Syntax snmp-server user <username> <groupname> {none | md5 <auth-
passphrase>} {none | des <priv-passphrase>}
no snmp-server user <username> <groupname>
157 Chapter 15 | SNMP Commands username - Name of the user connecting to the SNMP agent. (Range: 1-32 characters) groupname - Name of an SNMP group to which the user is assigned. (Range:
1-32 characters) none | md5 - Uses no authentication or MD5 authentication. auth-passphrase - Authentication password. Enter a minimum of eight characters for the user. (8 32 characters) none | des - Uses SNMPv3 with no privacy, or with DES56 encryption. priv-passphrase - Privacy password. Enter a minimum of eight characters for the user. (8 32 characters) Default Setting None Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage Multiple SNMPv3 users can be configured on the access point. Users must be assigned to groups that have the same security levels. If a user who has AuthPriv security (uses authentication and encryption) is assigned to a NoAuthNoPriv group, the user will not be able to access the database. An AuthPriv user must be assigned to the group with the AuthPriv security level. Example AP(config)#snmp-server user chris grname md5 passw1 des passw2 AP(config)#
snmp-server target This command configures SNMP v3 notification targets. Use the no form to delete an SNMP v3 target. Syntax snmp-server target <target-id> <ip-addr> <sec-name> <port-number>
[notification-filter-id]
no snmp-server target <target-id>
target-id - A user-defined name that identifies a receiver of SNMP notifications. (Maximum length: 32 characters) ip-addr - Specifies the IP address of the management station to receive notifications. sec-name - The defined SNMP v3 user name that is to receive notifications. 158 Chapter 15 | SNMP Commands port-number - The UDP port that is used on the receiving management station for notifications. notification-filter-id - The name if a defined notification filter. Default Setting None Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage The access point supports multiple SNMP v3 target IDs. The SNMP v3 user name that is specified in the target must first be configured using the snmp-server user command. Example AP(config)#snmp-server target tarname 192.168.1.33 chris 1234 AP(config)#
snmp-server filter This command configures SNMP v3 notification filters. Use the no form to delete an SNMP v3 filter or remove a subtree from a filter. Syntax snmp-server filter <filter-id> <include | exclude> <subtree>
no snmp-server filter <filter-id> [subtree]
filter-id - A user-defined name that identifies an SNMP v3 notification filter.
(Maximum length: 32 characters) include - Defines a filter type that includes objects in the MIB subtree. exclude - Defines a filter type that excludes objects in the MIB subtree. subtree - The part of the MIB subtree that is to be filtered. Default Setting None Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage The access point allows multiple notification filters to be created. Each filter can be defined by up to 20 MIB subtree ID entries. 159 Chapter 15 | SNMP Commands Use the command more than once with the same filter ID to build a filter that includes or excludes multiple MIB objects. Note that the filter entries are applied in the sequence that they are defined. The MIB subtree must be defined in the form .1.3.6.1 and always start with a .. Example AP(config)#snmp-server filter trapfilter include .1 AP(config)#snmp-server filter trapfilter exclude .1.3.6.1.2.1.2.2.1.1.23 show snmp users This command displays the SNMP v3 users and settings. Syntax show snmp users Command Mode Exec Example AP# show snmp users User List:
UserName : chris GroupName : testgroup AuthType : None PrivType : None UserName : david GroupName : group2 AuthType : MD5, Passphrase: ****************
PrivType : DES, Passphrase: ****************
AP#
show snmp target This command displays the SNMP v3 notification target settings. Syntax show snmp target Command Mode Exec 160 Chapter 15 | SNMP Commands Example AP# show snmp target Target List:
Target ID : christraps IP Address : 192.168.1.33 User Name : chris UDP Port : 4321 Filter ID : Not Defined
AP#
show snmp filter This command displays the SNMP v3 notification filter settings. Syntax show snmp filter [filter-id]
filter-id - A user-defined name that identifies an SNMP v3 notification filter.
(Maximum length: 32 characters) Command Mode Exec Example AP# show snmp filter Filter List:
Filter: defaultfilter Type: Included Subtree: .1 Type: Excluded Subtree: .1.3.6.1.2.1.2.2.1.1.23 Filter: testfilter Type: Excluded Subtree: .13.6.1.2.1.2.2.1.2
AP#
show snmp This command displays the SNMP configuration settings. Command Mode Exec 161 Chapter 15 | SNMP Commands Example AP# show snmp SNMP Information
Service State : Enable Community (ro) : *******
Community (rw) : ********
Location : where?
Contact : who?
Trap Destination List:
Trap Destination: 192.168.1.22, Community : *****
Trap Configuration:
systemUp: Disabled systemDown: Disabled
AP#
show snmp vacm view This command displays the configured SNMP v3 views. Syntax show snmp vacm view [view-name]
view-name - The name of a user-defined SNMPv3 view. Command Mode Exec Example AP# sh snmp vacm view View List:
View Name : defaultview Type : included OID : .1 Mask :
View Name : testview Type : included OID : .1 Mask :
Type : excluded OID : .13.6.1.2.1.2.2.1.2.1.1 Mask :
AP#
162 Chapter 15 | SNMP Commands show snmp vacm group This command displays the configured SNMP v3 groups. Syntax show snmp vacm group [group-name]
group-name - The name of a user-defined SNMPv3 group. Command Mode Exec Example AP# sh snmp vacm group Group List:
Group Name : testgroup Security Level : NoAuthNoPriv Read-View : defaultview Write-View : defaultview Group Name : group2 Security Level : AuthPriv Read-View : defaultview Write-View : defaultview
AP#
163 16 Flash/File Commands These commands are used to manage the system code or configuration files. Table 12: Flash/File Commands Command dual-image copy Function Mode Page Specifies the file or image used to start up the system GC Copies a code image or configuration between flash memory and a FTP/TFTP server 164 165 166 Exec Exec show dual-image Displays the name of the current operation code file that booted the system dual-image This command specifies the image used to start up the system. Syntax dual-image boot image [a | b]
a - Selects image file A as the startup software. b - Selects image file B as the startup software. Default Setting None Command Mode Exec Command Usage The access point supports two software image files (A and B), one of which is set as the boot image, or Active file, and the other acts as a Backup file. You can upgrade new access point software from a local file on the management workstation, or from an FTP or TFTP server. The new software file replaces the image (A or B) that is not currently set as the boot image. After upgrading new software, you must reboot the access point to implement the new code. Until a reboot occurs, the access point will continue to run the software it was using before the upgrade started. Also note that new software that is incompatible with the current configuration automatically restores the access point to the factory default settings when first activated after a reboot. 164 Chapter 16 | Flash/File Commands Example AP# dual-image boot-image A Change image to A AP#
copy This command copies a boot file, code image, or configuration file between the access points flash memory and a FTP/TFTP server. When you save the configuration settings to a file on a FTP/TFTP server, that file can later be downloaded to the access point to restore system operation. The success of the file transfer depends on the accessibility of the FTP/TFTP server and the quality of the network connection. Syntax copy {ftp [firmware | config] <file-name> <ip-address> <user-name>
<password> | tftp [firmware | config] <file-name> <ip-address>}
copy config {ftp <file-name> <ip-address> <user-name> <password> | tftp
<file-name> <ip-address>}
copy running startup ftp - Keyword that allows you to copy to/from an FTP server. tftp - Keyword that allows you to copy to/from a TFTP server. firmware - Keyword that allows you to copy a software image file from an FTP/TFTP server to flash memory. config - Keyword that allows you to copy a configuration file to/from an FTP/TFTP server. running startup - Keywords that save the current running configuration to the startup configuration file in flash memory. file-name - The name of a file to copy. ip-address - The IP address of an FTP or TFTP server. user-name - The access user name for the FTP server. password - The access password for the FTP server. Default Setting None Command Mode Exec Command Usage Only a configuration file can be uploaded to an FTP/TFTP server, but every type of file can be downloaded to the access point. 165 Chapter 16 | Flash/File Commands The destination file name should not contain slashes (\ or /), the leading letter of the file name should not be a period (.), and the maximum length for file names on the FTP/TFTP server is 255 characters or 32 characters for files on the access point. (Valid characters: A-Z, a-z, 0-9, ., -, _) Due to the size limit of the flash memory, the access point supports only two operation code files. Example The following example shows how to upload the configuration settings to a file on the TFTP server:
AP# copy config tftp syscfg 192.168.1.19 Backup Config to tftp was successful!!
AP#
The following example shows how to download a configuration file:
AP# copy tftp config syscfg 192.168.1.19 Restore Config from tftp was successful. AP#
show dual-image This command displays the name of the current operation code file that booted the system and the file saved as a secondary image. Syntax show dual image Command Mode Exec Example AP#show dual-image Image Status Version
Image A (Active) 1.1.0.6 Image B (Backup) 1.1.0.1 AP#
166 17 RADIUS Client Commands Remote Authentication Dial-in User Service (RADIUS) is a logon authentication protocol that uses software running on a central server to control access for RADIUS-aware devices to the network. An authentication server contains a database of credentials, such as users names and passwords, for each wireless client that requires access to the access point. Table 13: RADIUS Client Commands Command Function Mode Page radius-server enable Enables the RADIUS server. radius-server address Specifies the RADIUS server radius-server port Sets the RADIUS server network port radius-server key Sets the RADIUS encryption key radius-server accounting address radius-server accounting port radius-server accounting key Sets the RADIUS server accounting address Sets the RADIUS server accounting port Sets the RADIUS server accounting key radius-server accounting timeout-interim Sets the interval between transmitting accounting updates to the RADIUS server make-radius-effective Implements RADIUS command changes made in current CLI session. GC GC GC GC GC GC GC GC GC show radius Shows the current RADIUS settings Exec 167 168 168 169 169 170 170 171 171 172 radius-server enable This command enables the RADIUS server. Syntax radius-server {primary | secondary} enable primary - Specifies the primary RADIUS server. secondary - Specifies the secondary RADIUS server. Default Setting Enabled 167 Chapter 17 | RADIUS Client Commands Command Mode Global Configuration Example AP(config)# radius-server primary enable This setting has not been effective !
If want to take effect, please execute make-radius-effective command !
AP(config)#
radius-server address This command specifies the primary and secondary RADIUS server address. Syntax radius-server {primary | secondary} address <address>
address - IP address of server. Default Setting 10.7.16.96 Command Mode Global Configuration Example AP(config)# radius-server primary address 192.168.1.9 This setting has not been effective !
If want to take effect, please execute make-radius-effective command !
AP(config)#
radius-server port This command sets the RADIUS server network port. Syntax radius-server {primary | secondary} port <port_number>
port_number - RADIUS server UDP port used for authentication messages.
(Range: 1024-65535) Default Setting 1812 Command Mode Global Configuration 168 Chapter 17 | RADIUS Client Commands Example AP(config)# radius-server primary port 1810 This setting has not been effective !
If want to take effect, please execute make-radius-effective command !
AP(config)#
radius-server key This command sets the RADIUS encryption key. Syntax radius-server {primary | secondary] key <key_string>
key_string - Encryption key used to authenticate logon access for client. Do not use blank spaces in the string. (Maximum length: 20 characters) Default Setting DEFAULT Command Mode Global Configuration Example AP(config)# radius-server primary key green This setting has not been effective !
If want to take effect, please execute make-radius-effective command !
AP(config)#
radius-server accounting address This command sets the RADIUS Accounting server network IP address. Syntax radius-server accounting address <address>
address - IP address of the RADIUS Accounting server Default Setting 10.7.16.96 Command Mode Global Configuration 169 Chapter 17 | RADIUS Client Commands Command Usage When the RADIUS Accounting server UDP address is specified, a RADIUS accounting session is automatically started for each user that is successfully authenticated to the access point. Example AP(config)# radius-server accounting address 192.168.1.19 This setting has not been effective !
If want to take effect, please execute make-radius-effective command !
AP(config)#
radius-server accounting port This command sets the RADIUS Accounting port. Syntax radius-server accounting port <port>
port - The port used by the RADIUS Accounting server.
(Range: 1024~65535) Default Setting 1813 Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage When the RADIUS Accounting server UDP port is specified, a RADIUS accounting session is automatically started for each user that is successfully authenticated to the access point. Example AP(config)# radius-server accounting port 1882 This setting has not been effective !
If want to take effect, please execute make-radius-effective command !
AP(config)#
radius-server accounting key This command sets the RADIUS Accounting key. Syntax radius-server accounting key <key>
key - The RADIUS Accounting server keyphrase. 170 Chapter 17 | RADIUS Client Commands Default Setting DEFAULT Command Mode Global Configuration Example AP(config)# radius-server accounting key green This setting has not been effective !
If want to take effect, please execute make-radius-effective command !
AP(config)#
radius-server accounting timeout-interim This command sets the interval between transmitting accounting updates to the RADIUS server. Syntax radius-server accounting timeout-interim <number_of_seconds>}
number_of_seconds - Number of seconds the access point waits between transmitting accounting updates. (Range: 60-86400) Default Setting 300 Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage The access point sends periodic accounting updates after every interim period until the user logs off and a stop message is sent. Example AP(config)# radius-server accounting timeout-interim 600 This setting has not been effective !
If want to take effect, please execute make-radius-effective command !
AP(config)#
make-radius-effective This command implements the RADIUS settings made in the current CLI session. Default Setting None 171 Chapter 17 | RADIUS Client Commands Command Mode Global Configuration Example AP(config)# make-radius-effective It will take several minutes !
Please wait a while... AP(config)#
show radius This command displays the current settings for the RADIUS server. Default Setting None Command Mode Exec Example AP#show radius Radius Accounting Information
IP : 10.7.16.96 Key : *********
Port : 1813 timeout-interim : 300
Radius Primary Server Information
Status : ENABLED IP : 192.168.1.1 Port : 1812 Key : *********
Radius Secondary Server Information
Status : ENABLED IP : 10.7.16.96 Port : 1812 Key : ****
AP#
172 18 802.1X Authentication Commands The access point supports IEEE 802.1X access control for wireless clients. This control feature prevents unauthorized access to the network by requiring an 802.1X client application to submit user credentials for authentication. Client authentication is then verified by a RADIUS server using EAP (Extensible Authentication Protocol) before the access point grants client access to the network. The 802.1X EAP packets are also used to pass dynamic unicast session keys and static broadcast keys to wireless clients. Table 14: 802.1x Authentication Command 802.1x enable Function Configures 802.1X as enabled or disabled 802.1x reauthentication-
time Sets the timeout after which a connected client must be re-authenticated Mode Page IC-W-VAP 173 IC-W-VAP 174 802.1x enable This command configures 802.1X as enabled for wireless clients. Use the no form to disable 802.1X support. Syntax 802.1x enable no 802.1x Default Setting Disabled Command Mode Inface Configuration (Wireless-VAP) Command Usage When 802.1X is disabled, the access point does not support 802.1X authentication for any station. After successful 802.11 association, each client is allowed to access the network. 802.1X does not apply to the 1000BASE-T port. To display the current 802.1X status, use the show interface wireless command. 173 Chapter 18 | 802.1X Authentication Commands Example AP(if-wireless 0: VAP[0])# 802.1x enable This setting has not been effective !
If want to take effect, please execute make-security-effective command !
AP(if-wireless 0: VAP[0])#
Related Commands show interface wireless 802.1x reauthentication-time This command sets the time period after which a connected client must be re-
authenticated. Syntax 802.1x reauthentication-time <seconds>
seconds - The number of seconds. (Range: 0-1440) Default 600 seconds Command Mode Interface Configuration (Wireless-VAP) Example AP(if-wireless 0: VAP[0])# 802.1x reauthentication-time 600 This setting has not been effective !
If want to take effect, please execute make-security-effective command !
AP(if-wireless 0: VAP[0])#
174 19 MAC Address Authentication Commands Use these commands to define MAC authentication on the access point. For local MAC authentication, first define the default filtering policy, then enter the MAC addresses to be filtered, indicating if they are allowed or denied. For RADIUS MAC authentication, the MAC addresses and filtering policy must be configured on the RADIUS server. Table 15: MAC Address Authentication Command Function Mode Page mac-authentication server Sets address filtering to be performed with local or remote options GC mac-authentication server local address default mac-authentication server local address entry mac-authentication server local address delete mac-authentication session-timeout Sets local filtering to allow or deny listed addresses GC Enters a MAC address in the local filter table GC Removes a MAC address from the local filter table GC Sets the interval at which associated clients will be re-authenticated with the RADIUS server authentication database GC 175 176 176 177 178 show authentication Shows all authentication settings, as well as the address filter table Exec 178 mac-authentication server This command sets address filtering to be performed with local or remote options. Use the no form to disable MAC address authentication. Syntax mac-authentication server [local | remote]
no mac-authentication server local - Authenticate the MAC address of wireless clients with the local authentication database during 802.11 association. remote - Authenticate the MAC address of wireless clients with the RADIUS server during 802.1X authentication. Default Disabled Command Mode Global Configuration 175 Chapter 19 | MAC Address Authentication Commands Example AP(config)#mac-authentication server remote AP(config)#
Related Commands mac-authentication server local address entry radius-server address mac-authentication server local address default This command sets local filtering to allow or deny listed MAC addresses. Syntax mac-authentication server local address default <allowed | denied>
allowed - Only MAC addresses entered as denied in the address filtering table are denied. denied - Only MAC addresses entered as allowed in the address filtering table are allowed. Default Allowed Command Mode Global Configuration Example AP(config)#mac-authentication server local address default denied AP(config)#
Related Commands mac-authentication server local address entry mac-authentication server local address entry This command enters a MAC address in the local filter table. Syntax mac-authentication server local address entry <allowed | denied> <mac-
address>
allowed - Entry is allowed access. denied - Entry is denied access. mac-address - Physical address of client. (Enter six pairs of hexadecimal digits separated by hyphens; e.g., 00-90-D1-12-AB- 89.) 176 Chapter 19 | MAC Address Authentication Commands Default None Command Mode Global Configuration Command Mode The access point supports up to 1024 MAC addresses. An entry in the address table may be allowed or denied access depending on the global setting configured for the mac-authentication server local address default command. Example AP(config)#mac-authentication server local address entry allowed 00-70-50-cc-
99-1a AP(config)#
Related Commands mac-authentication server local address default mac-authentication server local address delete This command deletes a MAC address from the local filter table. Syntax mac-authentication server local address delete <allowed | denied> <mac-
address>
allowed - Entry is allowed access. denied - Entry is denied access. mac-address - Physical address of client. (Enter six pairs of hexadecimal digits separated by hyphens; e.g., 00-90-D1-12-AB-89.) Default None Command Mode Global Configuration Example AP(config)#mac-authentication server local address delete allowed 00-70-50-
cc-99-1b AP(config)#
177 Chapter 19 | MAC Address Authentication Commands mac-authentication session-timeout This command sets the interval at which associated clients will be re-authenticated with the RADIUS server authentication database. Use the no form to disable reauthentication. Syntax mac-authentication session-timeout <seconds>
no mac-authentication session-timeout seconds - Re-authentication interval. (Range: 30-65555) Default 0 (disabled) Command Mode Global Configuration Example AP(config)#mac-authentication session-timeout 300 AP(config)#
show authentication This command shows all authentication settings, as well as the address filter table. Command Mode Exec Example AP# show authentication Authentication Information
MAC Authentication Server : Disable Session Timeout : Disable Filter Table (Allow List):
Filter Table (Deny List):
AP#
178 20 Filtering Commands The commands described in this section are used to filter communications between wireless clients, control access to the management interface from wireless clients, and filter traffic using specific Ethernet protocol types. Table 16: Filtering Commands Command Function Mode Page filter local-bridge Disables communication between wireless clients filter restrict-
management filter dhcp Prevents wireless clients from accessing the management interface Prevents wireless clients from accessing a DHCP server filter acl-source-address Configures ACL filtering based on source MAC addresses filter acl-destination-
address Configures ACL filtering based on destination MAC addresses filter ethernet-type enable filter ethernet-type protocol Checks the Ethernet type for all incoming and outgoing Ethernet packets against the protocol filtering table Sets a filter for a specific Ethernet type GC GC GC GC GC GC GC show filters Shows the filter configuration Exec 179 180 180 181 181 182 182 183 filter local-bridge This command disables communication between wireless clients. Use the no form to disable this filtering. Syntax filter local-bridge <all-VAP | intra-VAP>
no filter local-bridge all-VAP - When enabled, clients cannot establish wireless communications with any other client, either those associated to the same VAP interface or any other VAP interface. intra-VAP - When enabled, clients associated with a specific VAP interface cannot establish wireless communications with each other. Clients can communicate with clients associated to other VAP interfaces. Default Disabled 179 Chapter 20 | Filtering Commands Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage This command can disable wireless-to-wireless communications between clients via the access point. However, it does not affect communications between wireless clients and the wired network. Example AP(config)#filter local-bridge all-vap AP(config)#
filter restrict-
management This command prevents wireless clients from accessing the management interface on the access point. Use the no form to disable this filtering. Syntax
[no] filter restrict-management Default Disabled Command Mode Global Configuration Example AP(config)#filter restrict-management AP(config)#
filter dhcp This command prevents the AP or wireless clients from obtaining an IP address from a DHCP server installed on wireless client. Syntax filter dhcp <enable | disable>
enable - Prevent DHCP IP assignment from a wireless client. disable - Allow DHCP IP assignment from a wireless client. Default Disabled Command Mode Global Configuration 180 Chapter 20 | Filtering Commands Example AP(config)#filter dhcp enable AP(config)#
filter acl-source-
address This command configures ACL filtering based on source MAC addresses in data frames. Syntax filter acl-source-address {enable | disable | add <mac-address> | delete
<mac-address>}
enable - Key word that enables ACL filtering on the access point. disable - Key word that disables ACL filtering on the access point. add - Key word that adds a MAC address to the filter table. delete - Key word that removes a MAC address from the filter table mac-address - Specifies a MAC address in the form xx-xx-xx-xx-xx-xx. Default Disabled Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage You can add up to 128 MAC addresses to the filtering table. Example AP(config)#filter acl-source-address add 00-12-34-56-78-9a AP(config)#filter acl-source-address enable AP(config)#
filter acl-destination-
address This command configures ACL filtering based on source MAC addresses in data frames. Syntax filter acl-destination-address {enable | disable | add <mac-address> | delete
<mac-address>}
enable - Key word that enables ACL filtering on the access point. disable - Key word that disables ACL filtering on the access point. add - Key word that adds a MAC address to the filter table. 181 Chapter 20 | Filtering Commands delete - Key word that removes a MAC address from the filter table mac-address - Specifies a MAC address in the form xx-xx-xx-xx-xx-xx. Default Disabled Command Mode Global Configuration Example AP(config)#filter acl-destination-address add 00-12-34-56-78-9a AP(config)#filter acl-destination-address enable AP(config)#
filter ethernet-type enabled This command checks the Ethernet type on all incoming and outgoing Ethernet packets against the protocol filtering table. Use the no form to disable this feature. Syntax
[no] filter ethernet-type enabled Default Disabled Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage This command is used in conjunction with the filter ethernet-type protocol command to determine which Ethernet protocol types are to be filtered. Example AP(config)#filter ethernet-type enabled AP(config)#
Related Commands filter ethernet-type protocol filter ethernet-type protocol This command sets a filter for a specific Ethernet type. Use the no form to disable filtering for a specific Ethernet type. Syntax
[no] filter ethernet-type protocol <protocol>
182 Chapter 20 | Filtering Commands protocol - An Ethernet protocol type. (Options: ARP, RARP, Berkeley-Trailer-
Negotiation, LAN-Test, X25-Level-3, Banyan, CDP, DEC XNS, DEC-MOP-
Dump-Load, DEC-MOP, DEC-LAT, Ethertalk, Appletalk-ARP, Novell-IPX(old), Novell-IPX(new), EAPOL, Telxon-TXP, Aironet-DDP, Enet-Config-Test, IP, IPv6, NetBEUI, PPPoE_Discovery, PPPoE_PPP_Session) Default None Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage Use the filter ethernet-type enable command to enable filtering for Ethernet types specified in the filtering table, or the no filter ethernet-type enable command to disable all filtering based on the filtering table. Example AP(config)#filter ethernet-type protocol ARP AP(config)#
Related Commands filter ethernet-type enabled show filters This command shows the filter options and protocol entries in the filter table. Syntax show filters [acl-source-address | acl-destination-address]
Command Mode Exec Example AP#show filters Protocol Filter Information
Local Bridge :Traffic among all client STAs blocked AP Management :DISABLED EtherType Filter :DISABLED Enabled EtherType Filters
AP#
183 Chapter 20 | Filtering Commands 184 21 Spanning Tree Commands The commands described in this section are used to set the MAC address table aging time and spanning tree parameters for both the Ethernet and wireless interfaces. Table 17: Spanning Tree Commands Command Function Mode Page bridge stp service Enables the Spanning Tree feature GC bridge stp br-conf forwarding-delay Configures the spanning tree bridge forward time GC bridge stp br-conf hello-time Configures the spanning tree bridge hello time bridge stp br-conf max-age Configures the spanning tree bridge maximum age bridge stp br-conf priority Configures the spanning tree bridge priority bridge stp port-conf interface bridge-link path-cost Enters STP interface configuration mode Configures the spanning tree path cost for the Ethernet port bridge-link port-priority Configures the spanning tree priority for the Ethernet port GC GC GC GC IC-E IC-E 186 186 187 187 188 188 189 189 vap path-cost port-priority Selects the VAP interface in STP interface configuration mode Sets the path cost for a VAP interface in STP interface configuration mode Sets the port priority for a VAP interface in STP interface configuration mode GC-STP 190 GC-STP 190 GC-STP 191 bridge mac-aging Sets the MAC address aging time show bridge stp Displays the global spanning tree settings show bridge br-conf show bridge port-conf show bridge status Displays spanning tree settings for specified VLANs Displays spanning tree settings for specified interfaces Displays STP bridge status for a specified VLAN or all VLANs show bridge forward address Displays STP settings for forwarding MAC addesses on specified interfaces or VLANs GC Exec Exec Exec Exec Exec show bridge mac-aging Displays the current MAC address table aging time Exec 191 192 192 193 194 195 196 185 Chapter 21 | Spanning Tree Commands bridge stp service This command enables the Spanning Tree Protocol. Use the no form to disable the Spanning Tree Protocol. Syntax
[no] bridge stp service Default Setting Enabled Command Mode Global Configuration Example This example globally enables the Spanning Tree Protocol. AP(config)bridge stp service AP(config) bridge stp br-conf forwarding-delay Use this command to configure the spanning tree bridge forward time globally for the wireless bridge. Syntax bridge stp br-conf forwarding-delay <seconds>
seconds - Time in seconds. (Range: 4 - 30 seconds) The minimum value is the higher of 4 or [(max-age / 2) + 1]. Default Setting 15 seconds Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage This command sets the maximum time (in seconds) the root device will wait before changing states (i.e., discarding to learning to forwarding). This delay is required because every device must receive information about topology changes before it starts to forward frames. In addition, each port needs time to listen for conflicting information that would make it return to the discarding state; otherwise, temporary data loops might result. Example AP(config)#bridge stp br-conf forwarding-delay 20 AP(config)#
186 Chapter 21 | Spanning Tree Commands bridge stp br-conf hello-time Use this command to configure the spanning tree bridge hello time globally for the wireless bridge. Syntax bridge stp br-conf hello-time <time>
time - Time in seconds. (Range: 1-10 seconds). The maximum value is the lower of 10 or [(max-age / 2) -1]. Default Setting 2 seconds Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage This command sets the time interval (in seconds) at which the root device transmits a configuration message. Example AP(config)#bridge stp br-conf hello-time 5 AP(config)#
bridge stp br-conf max-age Use this command to configure the spanning tree bridge maximum age globally for the wireless bridge. Syntax bridge stp br-conf max-age <seconds>
seconds - Time in seconds. (Range: 6-40 seconds) The minimum value is the higher of 6 or [2 x (hello-time + 1)]. The maximum value is the lower of 40 or [2 x (forward-time - 1)]. Default Setting 20 seconds Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage This command sets the maximum time (in seconds) a device can wait without receiving a configuration message before attempting to reconfigure. All device ports (except for designated ports) should receive configuration messages at regular intervals. Any port that ages out STP information (provided in the last configuration message) becomes the designated port for the attached LAN. If it is a 187 Chapter 21 | Spanning Tree Commands root port, a new root port is selected from among the device ports attached to the network. Example AP(config)#bridge stp max-age 40 AP(config)#
bridge stp br-conf priority Use this command to configure the spanning tree priority globally for the wireless bridge. Syntax bridge stp br-conf priority <priority>
priority - Priority of the bridge. (Range: 0 - 65535) Default Setting 32768 Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage Bridge priority is used in selecting the root device, root port, and designated port. The device with the highest priority becomes the STP root device. However, if all devices have the same priority, the device with the lowest MAC address will then become the root device. Example AP(config)#bridge stp br-conf priority 40000 AP(config)#
bridge stp port-conf interface This command enters STP interface configuration mode. Syntax bridge stp port-conf interface {ethernet | wireless <index>}
index - The wireless interface index number. (Only 0 for this AP.) Default Setting None Command Mode Global Configuration 188 Chapter 21 | Spanning Tree Commands Command Usage Use this command to enter STP interface configuration mode. In this mode STP settings for specific VAP interfaces can be configured. Example AP(config)# bridge stp port-conf interface wireless 0 Enter Wireless configuration commands, one per line. AP(stp-if-wireless 0)#
bridge-link path-cost Use this command to configure the spanning tree path cost for the Ethernet port. Syntax bridge-link path-cost <cost>
cost - The path cost for the port. (Range: 1-65535) Default Setting 4 Command Mode Interface Configuration (Ethernet) Command Usage This command is used by the Spanning Tree Protocol to determine the best path between devices. Therefore, lower values should be assigned to ports attached to faster media, and higher values assigned to ports with slower media. Path cost takes precedence over port priority. Example AP(if-wireless a)#bridge-link path-cost 1 50 AP(if-wireless a)#
bridge-link port-
priority Use this command to configure the priority for the Ethernet port. Syntax bridge-link port-priority <priority>
priority - The priority for a port. (Range: 1-255) Default Setting 32 189 Chapter 21 | Spanning Tree Commands Command Mode Interface Configuration (Ethernet) Command Usage This command defines the priority for the use of a port in the Spanning Tree Protocol. If the path cost for all ports on a wireless bridge are the same, the port with the highest priority (that is, lowest value) will be configured as an active link in the spanning tree. Where more than one port is assigned the highest priority, the port with lowest numeric identifier will be enabled. Example AP(if-wireless a)#bridge-link port-priority 1 64 AP(if-wireless a)#
Related Commands bridge-link path-cost vap (STP Interface) This command selects the VAP interface for configuring STP settings. Syntax vap <vap-index>
vap-index - The index number for the VAP interface. (Range: 0-7) Command Mode Global Configuration (STP interface) Example AP(stp-if-wireless 0)# vap 0 AP(stp-if-wireless 0: VAP[0])#
path-cost (STP Interface) This command sets the spanning tree path cost for the VAP interface. Syntax path-cost <cost>
cost - The path cost for the VAP interface. (Range: 1-65535) Command Mode Global Configuration (STP interface) 190 Chapter 21 | Spanning Tree Commands Command Usage This command is used by the Spanning Tree Protocol to determine the best path between devices. Therefore, lower values should be assigned to interfaces with faster media, and higher values assigned to interfaces with slower media. Path cost takes precedence over port priority. Example AP(stp-if-wireless 0: VAP[0])# path-cost 512 AP(stp-if-wireless 0: VAP[0])#
port-priority (STP Interface) This command sets the spanning tree path cost for the VAP interface. Syntax port-priority <priority>
priority - The priority for the VAP interface. (Range: 0-63) Command Mode Global Configuration (STP interface) Command Usage This command defines the priority for the use of an interface in the Spanning Tree Protocol. If the path cost for all interfaces on a bridge are the same, the interface with the highest priority (that is, lowest value) will be configured as an active link in the spanning tree. Where more than one interface is assigned the highest priority, the interface with lowest numeric identifier will be enabled. Example AP(stp-if-wireless 0: VAP[0])# port-priority 10 AP(stp-if-wireless 0: VAP[0])#
bridge mac-aging This command sets the MAC address table aging time. Syntax bridge mac-aging <aging-time>
aging-time - The time after which a learned MAC address is discarded.
(Range: 10-1000000 seconds) Default 300 seconds 191 Chapter 21 | Spanning Tree Commands Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage The AP stores the MAC addresses for all known devices. All the addresses learned by monitoring traffic are stored in a dynamic address table. This information is used to pass traffic directly between inbound and outbound interfaces. When the MAC address table aging time has expired, a learned MAC address is discarded from the table. Example AP(config)# bridge mac-aging 300 AP(config)#
show bridge stp This command displays the global spanning tree settings for the bridge. Syntax show bridge stp Command Mode Exec Example AP#show bridge stp Bridge STP Information
Bridge MAC : 00:12:CF:A2:54:30 Status : Disabled priority : 32768 Hello Time : 2 seconds Maximum Age : 20 seconds Forward Delay : 15 seconds
AP#
show bridge br-conf This command displays spanning tree settings for a specified VLAN. Syntax show bridge br-conf <all | vlan-id>
all - Keyword to show the STP configuration for all VLANs. vlan-id - Specifies a VLAN ID. (Range: 0-4095) Command Mode Exec 192 Chapter 21 | Spanning Tree Commands Example AP# show bridge br-conf all BR0 configuration
BRIDGE MAC : 00:12:cf:a2:54:30 Priority : 32768 Hello Time : 2 Maximum Age : 20 Forward Delay : 0
AP#
show bridge port-conf interface This command displays spanning tree settings for specified interfaces. Syntax show bridge port-conf interface {all | ethernet | wireless index <all | vap vap-index>}
all - Keyword to display STP settings for all interfaces. ethernet - Keyword to display STP settings for the Ethernet interface. wireless - Keyword to display STP settings for the Wireless interface. vap - Keyword to display STP settings for a specific VAP interface. Command Mode Exec Example AP#show bridge port-conf interface all ETH0 configuration
Link Port Priority : 32 Link Path Cost : 4
ATH0 configuration
Link Port Priority : 32 Link Path Cost : 19
ATH1 configuration
Link Port Priority : 32 Link Path Cost : 19
ATH2 configuration
Link Port Priority : 32 Link Path Cost : 19
193 Chapter 21 | Spanning Tree Commands ATH3 configuration
Link Port Priority : 32 Link Path Cost : 19
ATH4 configuration
Link Port Priority : 32 Link Path Cost : 19
ATH5 configuration
Link Port Priority : 32 Link Path Cost : 19
ATH6 configuration
Link Port Priority : 32 Link Path Cost : 19
ATH7 configuration
Link Port Priority : 32 Link Path Cost : 19
AP#
show bridge status This command displays STP bridge status for a specified VLAN or all VLANs. Syntax show bridge status <all | vlan-id>
all - Keyword to show the bridge status for all VLANs. vlan-id - Specifies a VLAN ID. (Range: 0-4095) Command Mode Exec Example AP# show bridge status all br0 status
Bridge ID : 8000.0012cfa25430 Designated Root ID : 8000.0012cfa25430 Root Port : 0 ath0 --- port 0x2 Port ID : 0x8002 Designated Root ID : 8000.0012cfa25430 194 Chapter 21 | Spanning Tree Commands Designated Bridge ID : 8000.0012cfa25430 Root Port Path Cost : 0 State : FORWARDING eth0 --- port 0x1 Port ID : 0x8001 Designated Root ID : 8000.0012cfa25430 Designated Bridge ID : 8000.0012cfa25430 Root Port Path Cost : 0 State : DISABLED
AP#
show bridge forward address This command displays STP settings for forwarding MAC addesses on specified interfaces or VLANs. Syntax show bridge forward address {all | mac <mac-address> |
<vlan-id>}
show bridge forward address {ethernet | wireless <index> vap <vap-index>}
all - Show settings for all forwarding MAC addresses. mac - Show settings for specific forwarding MAC addresses. MAC addresses are specified in the form xx-xx-xx-xx-xx-xx. ethernet - The Ethernet port interface. wireless - The wireless port interface. vap - Wireless VAP interfaces. (Wireless Range: 0;
VAP Range: 0-7) vlan-id - Show settings for forwarding addresses on specific VLANs. (Range:
0-4095) Command Mode Exec Example AP# show bridge forward-addr interface wireless 0 vap 0 MAC ADDRESS INTERFACE VLAN AGE
02:12:cf:a2:54:30 ath0 0 0
AP#
195 Chapter 21 | Spanning Tree Commands show bridge mac-
aging This command displays the MAC address table aging time. Syntax show bridge mac-aging Command Mode Exec Example AP# show bridge mac-aging mac-aging time 300 AP#
196 22 WDS Bridge Commands The commands described in this section are used to set the operation mode for each access point interface and configure Wireless Distribution System (WDS) forwarding table settings. Table 18: WDS Bridge Commands Command wds ap wds sta Function Selects the bridge operation mode for a radio interface Mode Page IC-W VAP 197 Configures the MAC addresses of the parent bridge node IC-W VAP 197 show wds wireless Configures MAC addresses of connected child bridge nodes Exec 198 wds ap This command enables the bridge operation mode for the radio interface. Syntax wds ap Default Setting Disabled Command Mode Interface Configuration (Wireless) VAP Example AP(if-wireless 0 [VAP 0])#wds ap AP(if-wireless 0 [VAP 0])#
wds sta This command configures WDS station mode on a VAP interface. Syntax wds sta ap-ssid <ssid> address <mac-address>
ssid - Severice set identifier. Maximum: 32 characters. mac-address - The MAC address of the connecting VAP in WDS-AP mode. 197 Chapter 22 | WDS Bridge Commands Default Setting None Command Mode Interface Configuration (Wireless) VAP Command Usage In WDS-STA mode, the VAP operates as a client station in WDS mode, which connects to an access point in WDS-AP mode. The user needs to specify the SSID and MAC address of the VAP to which it intends to connect. Example AP(if-wireless 0 [VAP 0])#wds sta ap-ssid red address 00-11-22-33-44-55 AP(if-wireless 0 [VAP 0])#
show wds wireless This command displays the current WDS settings for VAPs. Syntax show wds wireless <index> vap {all | <vap-index>}
index -The wireless interface index number. (Option: 0) vap-index - The VAP index number. (Range: 0-7) Command Mode Exec Example AP# show wds wireless 0 vap 0 WDS Status(wireless 0 vap 0)
Status: up Mode: STA AP SSID: red AP MAC: 00:11:22:33:44:55
AP#
198 23 Ethernet Interface Commands The commands described in this section configure connection parameters for the Ethernet port and wireless interface. Table 19: Ethernet Interface Commands Command Function Mode Page interface ethernet Enters Ethernet interface configuration mode GC dns ip address ip dhcp Specifies the primary and secondary name servers IC-E Sets the IP address for the Ethernet interface Submits a DHCP request for an IP address ip management address Sets a static IP address for management access ipv6 address Sets the IPv6 address for the Ethernet interface ipv6 dhcp shutdown Submits a DHCPv6 request for an IPv6 address Disables the Ethernet interface IC-E IC-E IC-E IC-E IC-E IC-E show interface ethernet Shows the status for the Ethernet interface Exec interface ethernet This command enters Ethernet interface configuration mode. 199 200 200 201 202 202 203 204 205 Default Setting None Command Mode Global Configuration Example To specify the 1000BASE-T network interface, enter the following command:
AP(config)#interface ethernet AP(if-ethernet)#
199 Chapter 23 | Ethernet Interface Commands dns This command specifies the address for the primary or secondary domain name server to be used for name-to-address resolution. Syntax dns {primary-server | secondary-server} <server-address>
primary-server - Primary server used for name resolution. secondary-server - Secondary server used for name resolution. server-address - IP address of domain-name server. Default Setting None Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage The primary and secondary name servers are queried in sequence. Example This example specifies two domain-name servers. AP(if-ethernet)#dns primary-server 192.168.1.55 AP(if-ethernet)#dns secondary-server 10.1.0.55 AP(if-ethernet)#
Related Commands show interface ethernet ip address This command sets the IP address for the access point. Use the no form to restore the default IP address. Syntax ip address <ip-address> <netmask> <gateway>
no ip address ip-address - IP address. netmask - Network mask for the associated IP subnet. This mask identifies the host address bits used for routing to specific subnets. gateway - IP address of the default gateway. Default Setting IP address: 192.168.2.10 Netmask: 255.255.255.0 200 Chapter 23 | Ethernet Interface Commands Command Mode Interface Configuration (Ethernet) Command Usage DHCP is disabled by default. If DHCP is enabled, you must first disable the DHCP client with the no ip dhcp command before you manually configure a new IP address. You must assign an IP address to this device to gain management access over the network or to connect the access point to existing IP subnets. You can manually configure a specific IP address using this command, or direct the device to obtain an address from a DHCP server using the ip dhcp command. Valid IP addresses consist of four numbers, 0 to 255, separated by periods. Anything other than this format will not be accepted by the configuration program. Example AP(config)#interface ethernet Enter Ethernet configuration commands, one per line. AP(if-ethernet)#ip address 192.168.1.2 255.255.255.0 192.168.1.253 AP(if-ethernet)#
Related Commands ip dhcp ip dhcp This command enables the access point to obtain an IP address from a DHCP server. Use the no form to restore the default IP address. Syntax
[no] ip dhcp Default Setting Disabled Command Mode Interface Configuration (Ethernet) Command Usage You must assign an IP address to this device to gain management access over the network or to connect the access point to existing IP subnets. You can manually configure a specific IP address using the ip address command, or direct the device to obtain an address from a DHCP server using this command. When you use this command, the access point will begin broadcasting DHCP client requests. The current IP address will continue to be effective until a DHCP reply is received. Requests will be broadcast periodically by this device in an 201 Chapter 23 | Ethernet Interface Commands effort to learn its IP address. (DHCP values can include the IP address, subnet mask, and default gateway.) Example AP(config)#interface ethernet Enter Ethernet configuration commands, one per line. AP(if-ethernet)#ip dhcp AP(if-ethernet)#
Related Commands ip address ip management address This command sets the IP address for management access to the AP. Syntax ip management address <ip-address> <netmask>
ip-address - The IP address for management access. netmask - Network mask for the associated IP subnet. Default Setting IP address: 192.168.1.10 Netmask: 255.255.255.0 Command Mode Interface Configuration (Ethernet) Command Usage The AP must have an IP address to gain management access over the network. The management IP is a static address that can be used to access the AP in the event that DHCP assignment fails. Example AP(config)#interface ethernet Enter Ethernet configuration commands, one per line. AP(if-ethernet)# ip management address 192.168.1.2 255.255.255.0 AP(if-ethernet)#
ipv6 address This command sets the IPv6 address for the access point. Use the no form to restore the default IPv6 address. Syntax ipv6 address <ipv6-address> <netmask> <gateway>
no ipv6 address 202 Chapter 23 | Ethernet Interface Commands ipv6-address - IPv6 address. netmask - Network mask for the associated IPv6 subnet. This mask identifies the host address bits used for routing to specific subnets. gateway - IPv6 address of the default gateway. Default Setting IP address: 2001:db8::1 Netmask: 64 Gateway: 2001:db8::2 Command Mode Interface Configuration (Ethernet) Command Usage DHCPv6 is disabled by default. To manually configure a new IPv6 address, you must first disable the DHCPv6 client with the no ipv6 dhcp command. You must assign an IPv6 address to this device to gain management access over the network or to connect the access point to existing IPv6 subnets. You can manually configure a specific IPv6 address using this command, or direct the device to obtain an address from a DHCPv6 server using the ipv6 dhcp command. Example AP(config)#interface ethernet Enter Ethernet configuration commands, one per line. Enterprise AP(if-ethernet)#ipv6 address 2001:db8::10 64 2001:db8::19 AP(if-ethernet)#
Related Commands ipv6 dhcp ipv6 dhcp This command enables the access point to obtain an IPv6 address from a DHCPv6 server. Use the no form to restore the default IPv6 address. Syntax
[no] ipv6 dhcp Default Setting Disabled Command Mode Interface Configuration (Ethernet) 203 Chapter 23 | Ethernet Interface Commands Command Usage You must assign an IPv6 address to this device to gain management access over the network or to connect the access point to existing IPv6 subnets. You can manually configure a specific IPv6 address using the ipv6 address command, or direct the device to obtain an address from a DHCPv6 server using this command. When you use this command, the access point will begin broadcasting DHCPv6 client requests. The current IPv6 address (i.e., default or manually configured address) will continue to be effective until a DHCPv6 reply is received. Requests will be broadcast periodically by this device in an effort to learn its IPv6 address.
(DHCPv6 values can include the IPv6 address, subnet mask, and default gateway.) Example AP(config)#interface ethernet Enter Ethernet configuration commands, one per line. AP(if-ethernet)#ipv6 dhcp AP(if-ethernet)#
Related Commands ipv6 address shutdown (Ethernet) This command disables the Ethernet interface. To restart a disabled interface, use the no form. Syntax
[no] shutdown Default Setting Interface enabled Command Mode Interface Configuration (Ethernet) Command Usage This command allows you to disable the Ethernet port due to abnormal behavior
(e.g., excessive collisions), and reenable it after the problem has been resolved. You may also want to disable the Ethernet port for security reasons. Example The following example disables the Ethernet port. AP(if-ethernet)#shutdown AP(if-ethernet)#
204 Chapter 23 | Ethernet Interface Commands show interface ethernet This command displays the status for the Ethernet interface. Syntax show ethernet interface Default Setting Ethernet interface Command Mode Exec Example AP#show interface ethernet Ethernet Interface Information
IP Address : 192.168.2.10 Subnet Mask : 255.255.255.0 Default Gateway : 192.168.2.254 Primary DNS :
Secondary DNS :
Management IP : 192.168.1.10 Management Subnet : 255.255.255.0 IPv6 Address : 2001:db8::1 IPv6 Subnet Mask : 64 IPv6 Gateway : 2001:db8::2 IPv6 Primary DNS :
IPv6 Secondary DNS :
Admin status : Up Operational status : Up
AP#
205 24 Wireless Interface Commands The commands described in this section configure connection parameters for the wireless interfaces. Table 20: Wireless Interface Commands Command Function interface wireless Enters wireless interface configuration mode vap a-mpdu a-msdu channel Provides access to the VAP interface configuration mode Sets the Aggregate MAC Protocol Data Unit (A-
MPDU) Sets the Aggregate MAC Service Data Unit (A-
MSDU) Configures the radio channel transmit-power Adjusts the power of the radio signals transmitted from the access point min-allowed-rate Selects minimum allowed transmit data rates disable-coexist Prevents 20 MHz and 40 MHz channels operating together make-rf-setting-
effective Implements wireless command changes made in current CLI session preamble Sets the length of the 802.11g signal preamble short-guard-interval Enables the 802.11n short guard interval Mode GC IC-W IC-W IC-W IC-W IC-W IC-W IC-W IC-W IC-W IC-W IC-W IC-W Page 207 208 208 209 209 210 211 212 212 213 213 214 214 beacon-interval dtim-period rts-threshold ssid closed system Configures the rate at which beacon signals are transmitted from the access point Configures the rate at which stations in sleep mode must wake up to receive broadcast/multicast transmissions Sets the packet size threshold at which an RTS must be sent to the receiving station prior to the sending station starting communications IC-W 215 Configures the service set identifier Opens access to clients without a pre-configured SSID IC-W-VAP 216 IC-W-VAP 217 max-client Sets the maximum number of clients per radio IC-W 217 max-association Sets the maximum number of clients per VAP client-assoc-preempt Implements a priority for associating clients IC-W-VAP 218 IC-W-VAP 218 206 Chapter 24 | Wireless Interface Commands Table 20: Wireless Interface Commands (Continued) Command Function assoc- timeout-interval Configures the idle time interval (when no frames are sent) after which a client is disassociated from the VAP interface auth- timeout-value Configures the time interval after which clients must be re-authenticated multicast-enhance Enhances multicast quality for wireless clients shutdown Disables the wireless interface interfere-chan-recover Rescans channels when interference is detected antenna-chain Sets the internal antennas to use long-distance Enables long distance parameter settings long-distance reference-
data Computes settings from a distance reference long-distance slottime Sets the slot time parameter long-distance acktimeout long-distance ctstimeout Sets the acknowledge timeout parameter Sets the CTS timeout parameter Mode Page IC-W-VAP 219 IC-W-VAP 220 IC-W-VAP 220 IC-W-VAP 221 IC-W IC-W IC-W IC-W IC-W IC-W IC-W 221 222 222 223 223 224 224 bandwidth-control downlink Enables downlink bandwidth control on a VAP interface bandwidth-control downlink rate Sets the downlink bandwidth rate for a VAP interface bandwidth-control uplink Enables uplink bandwidth control on a VAP interface IC-W-VAP 225 IC-W-VAP 225 IC-W-VAP 226 bandwidth-control uplink rate Sets the uplink bandwidth rate for a VAP interface IC-W-VAP 226 show interface wireless Shows the status for the wireless interface show station Shows the wireless clients associated with the access point Exec Exec show station statistics Shows traffic statistics for wireless clients associated with the access point Exec 227 228 229 interface wireless This command enters wireless interface configuration mode. Syntax interface wireless <index>
index - The index of the wireless interface. (Range: 0 or 1, where 0 is the 2.4 GHz interface and 1 the 5 GHz interface) Default Setting None 207 Chapter 24 | Wireless Interface Commands Command Mode Global Configuration Example AP(config)# interface wireless 0 Enter Wireless configuration commands, one per line. AP(if-wireless 0)#
vap This command provides access to the VAP (Virtual Access Point) interface configuration mode. Syntax vap <vap-index>
vap-index - The number that identifies the VAP interface.
(Options: 0-15) Default Setting None Command Mode Interface Configuration (Wireless) Example AP(if-wireless 0)#vap 0 AP(if-wireless 0: VAP[0])#
a-mpdu This command enables and sets the Aggregate MAC Protocol Data Unit
(A-MPDU). Syntax a-mpdu {enable | disable | length | <length >}
enable - Enable A-MPDU. disable - Disable A-MPDU. length - 1024-65535 bytes. Default Setting Disabled Command Mode Interface Configuration (Wireless) 208 Chapter 24 | Wireless Interface Commands Example AP(if-wireless 0)#a-mpdu enable AP(if-wireless 0)#
a-msdu This command enables and sets the Aggregate MAC Service Data Unit
(A-MSDU). Syntax a-msdu {enable | disable | length <length>}
enable - Enable A-MSDU. disable - Disable A-MSDU. length - 1024-65535 bytes. Default Setting Disabled Command Mode Interface Configuration (Wireless) Example AP(if-wireless 0)#a-msdu enable AP(if-wireless 0)#
channel This command configures the radio channel through which the access point communicates with wireless clients. Syntax channel {ht20 <ht20-channel> | ht40 <ht40-channel> | auto}
ht20-channel - The 802.11n 20 MHz channel number:
11ng mode: 01, 02, 03, 04, 05, 06, 07, 08, 09, 10, 11 11na mode: 36, 40, 44, 48, 52, 56, 60, 64, 100, 104, 108, 112, 116, 120, 124, 128, 132, 136, 140, 149, 153, 157, 161, 165 ht40-channel - The 802.11n 40 MHz channel number:
11ng mode: 01Plus, 02Plus, 03Plus, 04Plus, 05Plus, 05Minus, 06Plus, 06Minus, 07Plus, 07Minus, 08Minus, 09Minus, 10Minus, 11Minus 11na mode: 36Plus, 40Minus, 44Plus, 48Minus, 52Plus, 56Minus, 60Plus, 64Minus, 100Plus, 104Minus, 108Plus, 112Minus, 116Plus, 120Minus, 124Plus, 128Minus, 132Plus, 136Minus, 149Plus, 153Minus, 157Plus, 161Minus 209 Chapter 24 | Wireless Interface Commands auto - Automatically selects an unoccupied channel (if available). Otherwise, the lowest channel is selected. Default Setting Automatic channel selection Command Mode Interface Configuration (Wireless) Command Usage The available channel settings are limited by local regulations, which determine the number of channels that are available. The available channels depend on the radio interface, either 11b/g/n (2.4 GHZ) or 11a/n (5 GHz). The access point provides a channel bandwidth of 20 MHz by default giving an 802.11g connection speed of 54 Mbps and a 802.11n connection speed of up to 108 Mbps, and ensures backward compliance for slower 802.11b devices. Setting the HT Channel Bandwidth to 40 MHz increases connection speed for 802.11n up to 300 Mbps. HT40plus indicates that the secondary channel is above the primary channel. HT40minus indicates that the secondary channel is below the primary channel. For most wireless adapters, the channel for wireless clients is automatically set to the same as that used by the access point to which it is linked. Example AP(if-wireless 0)# channel ht20 06 This setting has not been effective !
If want to take effect, please execute make-RF-setting-effective command !
AP(if-wireless 0)#
transmit-power This command adjusts the power of the radio signals transmitted from the access point. Syntax transmit-power {percentage <percent-power> | dbm <dbm-power>}
percent-power - Signal strength as a percentage transmitted from the AP.
(Options: full, half, quarter, eighth, min) dbm-power - Signal strength in dBm transmitted from the AP.
(Range: 3-20 dBm) 210 Chapter 24 | Wireless Interface Commands Default Setting Percentage Mode: Full (100%) dBm Mode: 18 dBm Command Mode Interface Configuration (Wireless) Command Usage The min keyword indicates minimum power. The longer the transmission distance, the higher the transmission power required. But to support the maximum number of users in an area, you must keep the power as low as possible. Power selection is not just a trade off between coverage area and maximum supported clients. You also have to ensure that high strength signals do not interfere with the operation of other radio devices in your area. Example AP(if-wireless 0)# transmit-power percentage half AP(if-wireless 0)#
min-allowed-rate This command selects minimum allowed transmit data rates for the AP. Syntax min-allowed-rate {all | <cck-rate> <ofdm-rate> <singlestream-rate>
<doublestream-rate>}
all - Selects all available rates. cck-rate - Specifies the minimum CCK rate (2.4 GHz radio only).
(Options: 1, 2, 5. 5, 11 Mbps) ofdm-rate - Specifies the minimum OFDM rate.
(Options: 6, 9, 12, 18, 24, 36, 48, 54 Mbps) singlestream-rate - Specifies the minimum 802.11n single stream rate.
(Options: MCS0, MCS1, MCS2, MCS3, MCS4, MCS5, MCS6, MCS7) doublestream-rate - Specifies the minimum 802.11n double stream rate.
(Options: MCS8, MCS9, MCS10, MCS11, MCS12, MCS13, MCS14, MCS15) Default Setting CCK Rate: 1 Mbps OFDM Rate: 6 Mbps Single Stream Rate: MCS0 Double Stream Rate: MCS8 Command Mode Interface Configuration (Wireless) 211 Chapter 24 | Wireless Interface Commands Example AP(if-wireless 0)# min-allowed-rate 1 6 mcs0 mcs8 AP(if-wireless 0)#
disable-coexist This command prevents the operation of both 20 MHz and 40 MHz channel bandwidths in the wireless network. Syntax disable-coexist <n | y>
n - No, do not disable channel coexistance. y - Yes, disable channel coexistance. Default Setting No Command Mode Interface Configuration (Wireless) Example AP(if-wireless 0)# disable-coexist y AP(if-wireless 0)#
make-rf-setting-
effective This command implements all wireless command changes made in current CLI session. Syntax make-rf-setting-effective Command Mode Interface Configuration (Wireless) Example AP(if-wireless 0)# make-RF-setting-effective It will take several minutes !
Please wait a while... AP(if-wireless 0)#
212 Chapter 24 | Wireless Interface Commands preamble This command sets the length of the signal preamble that is used at the start of a 802.11b/g data transmission. Syntax preamble [long | short-or-long]
long - Sets the preamble to long (192 microseconds). short-or-long - Sets the preamble to short if no 802.11b clients are detected (96 microseconds). Default Setting Short-or-Long Command Mode Interface Configuration (Wireless) Command Usage Using a short preamble instead of a long preamble can increase data throughput on the access point, but requires that all clients can support a short preamble. Set the preamble to long to ensure the access point can support all 802.11b and 802.11g clients. Example AP(if-wireless 0)# preamble short-or-long This setting has not been effective !
If want to take effect, please execute make-RF-setting-effective command !
AP(if-wireless 0)#
short-guard-interval This command sets the 802.11n guard interval to 400ns (short) or 800ns (long). Syntax short-guard-interval <enable | disable>
Default Setting Disabled Command Mode Interface Configuration (Wireless) Command Usage The 802.11n draft specifies two guard intervals: 400ns (short) and 800ns (long). Support of the 400ns guard interval is optional for transmit and receive. The 213 Chapter 24 | Wireless Interface Commands purpose of a guard interval is to introduce immunity to propagation delays, echoes, and reflections to which digital data is normally very sensitive. Enabling the short guard interval sets it to 400ns. Example AP(if-wireless 0)# short-guard-interval enable This setting has not been effective !
If want to take effect, please execute make-RF-setting-effective command !
AP(if-wireless 0)#
beacon-interval This command configures the rate at which beacon signals are transmitted from the access point. Syntax beacon-interval <interval>
interval - The rate for transmitting beacon signals. (Range: 40-3500 TUs) Default Setting 100 TUs Command Mode Interface Configuration (Wireless) Command Usage The beacon signals allow wireless clients to maintain contact with the access point. They may also carry power-management information. Example AP(if-wireless 0)# beacon-interval 60 This setting has not been effective !
If want to take effect, please execute make-RF-setting-effective command !
AP(if-wireless 0)#
dtim-period This command configures the rate at which stations in sleep mode must wake up to receive broadcast/multicast transmissions. Syntax dtim-period <interval>
interval - Interval between the beacon frames that transmit broadcast or multicast traffic. (Range: 1-255 beacon frames) 214 Chapter 24 | Wireless Interface Commands Default Setting 1 Command Mode Interface Configuration (Wireless) Command Usage The Delivery Traffic Indication Map (DTIM) packet interval value indicates how often the MAC layer forwards broadcast/multicast traffic. This parameter is necessary to wake up stations that are using Power Save mode. The DTIM is the interval between two synchronous frames with broadcast/
multicast information. The default value of 1 indicates that the access point will save all broadcast/multicast frames for the Basic Service Set (BSS) and forward them after every beacon. Using smaller DTIM intervals delivers broadcast/multicast frames in a more timely manner, causing stations in Power Save mode to wake up more often and drain power faster. Using higher DTIM values reduces the power used by stations in Power Save mode, but delays the transmission of broadcast/
multicast frames. Example AP(if-wireless 0)# dtim-period 10 This setting has not been effective !
If want to take effect, please execute make-RF-setting-effective command !
AP(if-wireless 0)#
rts-threshold This command sets the packet size threshold at which a Request to Send (RTS) signal must be sent to the receiving station prior to the sending station starting communications. Syntax rts-threshold <threshold>
threshold - Threshold packet size for which to send an RTS.
(Range: 1-2346 bytes) Default Setting 2346 Command Mode Interface Configuration (Wireless) 215 Chapter 24 | Wireless Interface Commands Command Usage If the threshold is set to 1, the access point always sends RTS signals. If set to 2346, the access point never sends RTS signals. If set to any other value, and the packet size equals or exceeds the RTS threshold, the RTS/CTS (Request to Send /
Clear to Send) mechanism will be enabled. The access point sends RTS frames to a receiving station to negotiate the sending of a data frame. After receiving an RTS frame, the station sends a CTS frame to notify the sending station that it can start sending data. Access points contending for the wireless medium may not be aware of each other. The RTS/CTS mechanism can solve this Hidden Node problem. Example AP(if-wireless 0)# rts-threshold 1 This setting has not been effective !
If want to take effect, please execute make-RF-setting-effective command !
AP(if-wireless 0)#
ssid This command configures the service set identifier (SSID) of the VAP. Syntax ssid <string>
string - The name of a basic service set supported by the access point.
(Range: 1 - 32 characters) Default Setting 2.4 GHz: EAP9112A_11BGN_0 to 15 (for VAPs 0-15) 5 GHz: EAP9112A_11NA_0 to 15 (for VAPs 0-15) Command Mode Interface Configuration (Wireless-VAP) Command Usage Clients that want to connect to the wireless network through an access point must set their SSIDs to the same as that of the access point. Example AP(if-wireless 0: VAP[0])# ssid net-name This setting has not been effective !
If want to take effect, please execute make-security-effective command !
AP(if-wireless 0: VAP[0])#
216 Chapter 24 | Wireless Interface Commands closed-system This command prohibits access to clients without a pre-configured SSID. Use the no form to disable this feature. Syntax
[no] closed-system Default Setting Disabled Command Mode Interface Configuration (Wireless-VAP) Command Usage When closed system is enabled, the access point will not include its SSID in beacon messages. Nor will it respond to probe requests from clients that do not include a fixed SSID. Example AP(if-wireless 0: VAP[0])#closed-system This setting has not been effective !
If want to take effect, please execute make-security-effective command !
AP(if-wireless 0)#
max-client This command configures the maximum number of wireless clients that can associate with a radio. Syntax max-client <max-clients>
max-clients - The maximum number associated clients for the radio.
(Range: 1-127) Default Setting 127 Command Mode Interface Configuration (Wireless) Command Usage This command sets the total maximum number of clients that may associate with the radio. This includes the total clients associated to all VAP interfaces. The maximum number of clients that can associate to a specific VAP interface can be set using the max-association command. 217 Chapter 24 | Wireless Interface Commands Example AP(if-wireless 0)# max-client 64 This setting has not been effective !
If want to take effect, please execute make-security-effective command !
AP(if-wireless 0)#
max-association This command configures the maximum number of wireless clients that can associate with a VAP interface. Syntax max-association <max-clients>
max-clients - The maximum number associated clients for the VAP interface.
(Range: 1-127) Default Setting 127 Command Mode Interface Configuration (Wireless-VAP) Command Usage This command sets the total maximum number of clients that may associate with a VAP interface. If the value is greater than the setting for the maximum clients per radio (max-client command), the command does not take effect. Example AP(if-wireless 0: VAP[0])# max-association 64 AP(if-wireless 0: VAP[0])#
client-assoc-preempt This command enables a feature that implements a priority for associating clients when the maximum has been reached. Use the no form to disable the feature. Syntax
[no] client-assoc-preempt Default Setting Disabled Command Mode Interface Configuration (Wireless-VAP) 218 Chapter 24 | Wireless Interface Commands Command Usage When enabled, the AP applies a priority order for associating clients when the maximum clients for the VAP has been reached. The priority order is 11n clients, 11a/g clients, then 11b clients. When the association pool for the VAP is full and the AP receives an association request from a high-priority (11n) client, the AP sends a disassociation to a lower priority client (11a/g or 11b) in order to be able to associate the high-
priority client. If there are no lower-priority clients to disassociate, the AP will reject the association request. Example AP(if-wireless 0: VAP[0])# client-assoc-preempt set_vap_assoc_pri 0 0 y This setting has not been effective !
If want to take effect, please execute make-security-effective command !
AP(if-wireless 0: VAP[0])#
assoc-timeout-
interval This command configures the idle time interval (when no frames are sent) after which the client is disassociated from the VAP interface. Syntax assoc-timeout-interval <minutes>
minutes - The number of minutes of inactivity before disassociation.
(Range: 5-60 minutes) Default Setting 5 minutes Command Mode Interface Configuration (Wireless-VAP) Example AP(if-wireless 0: VAP[0])# assoc-timeout-interval 10 This setting has not been effective !
If want to take effect, please execute make-security-effective command !
AP(if-wireless 0: VAP[0])#
219 Chapter 24 | Wireless Interface Commands auth-timeout-interval This command configures the time interval within which clients must complete authentication to the VAP interface. Syntax auth-timeout-interval <minutes>
minutes - The number of minutes before re-authentication. (Range: 3-60 minutes) Default Setting 3 minutes Command Mode Interface Configuration (Wireless-VAP) Example AP(if-wireless 0: VAP[0])# auth-timeout-interval 10 This setting has not been effective !
If want to take effect, please execute make-security-effective command !
AP(if-wireless 0: VAP[0])#
multicast-enhance This command enables a feature that improves multicast video quality for wireless clients. Use the no form to disable the feature. Syntax
[no] multicast-enhance Default Setting Disabled Command Mode Interface Configuration (Wireless-VAP) Command Usage When a wireless client joins a multicast group, this feature converts multicast packets to unicast packets to improve multicast video quality. Example AP(if-wireless 0: VAP[0])# multicast-enhance set_vap_mcastenhance 0 0 2 This setting has not been effective !
If want to take effect, please execute make-security-effective command !
AP(if-wireless 0: VAP[0])#
220 Chapter 24 | Wireless Interface Commands shutdown (VAP) This command disables the VAP interface. Use the no form to restart the interface. Syntax
[no] shutdown Default Setting Interface enabled Command Mode Interface Configuration (Wireless-VAP) Command Usage You must first enable VAP interface 0 before you can enable VAP interfaces 1 to 15. Example AP(if-wireless 0: VAP[0])# shutdown This setting has not been effective !
If want to take effect, please execute make-security-effective command !
AP(if-wireless 0: VAP[0])#
interfere-chan-
recover This command rescans channels when interference is detected on the current channel. Use the no form to disable the feature. Syntax
[no] interfere-chan-recover Default Setting Disabled Command Mode Interface Configuration (Wireless) Command Usage When interference is detected on the current channel, the AP re-scans all channels and then changes to a new clear channel. There is too much interference on a channel when the AP is unable to send the beacon signal more than ten times. The AP will then use its auto-channel algorithm to find a new clear channel. Example AP(if-wireless 0)# interfere-chan-recover AP(if-wireless 0)#
221 Chapter 24 | Wireless Interface Commands antenna-chain This command selects the use of two antennas or a single antenna for radio transmissions. Syntax antenna-chain <right-left | left | right>
right-left - The radio transmits from both internal antennas. left - The radio only transmits from one internal antenna. right - The radio only transmits from one internal antenna. Default Setting right-left Command Mode Interface Configuration (Wireless) Example AP(if-wireless 0)# antenna-chain left This setting has not been effective !
If want to take effect, please execute make-RF-setting-effective command !
AP(if-wireless 0)#
long-distance This command computes settings that allow wireless clients a long distance from the AP to maintain communications. Syntax long-distance <enable | disable>
enable - Enables the long distance settings. disable - Disables the feature. Default Disabled Command Mode Interface Configuration (Wireless) Command Usage When you have long-distance links in the wireless network, some timing parameters require an adjustment to maintain communications. You can enable this feature and then use the long-distance reference-data command to suggest settings based on an approximate distance. 222 Chapter 24 | Wireless Interface Commands Example AP(if-wireless 0)# long-distance enable For making changes effective, please execute make-RF-setting-effective command !
AP(if-wireless 0)#
long-distance reference-data This command computes settings that allow wireless clients a long distance from the AP to maintain communications. Syntax long-distance reference-data <distance>
distance - An approximate distance in meters. (Range: 1-50000 meters) Default 0 Command Mode Interface Configuration (Wireless) Command Usage Enter the approximate distance (in meters) of the client from the AP. The AP computes a set of recommended values for SlotTime, ACKTimeOut and CTSTimeOut. You can use the recommended values or enter your own values that work for your specific environment. Example AP(if-wireless 0)# long-distance reference-data 1000 Distance(m): 1000 Slot time(us): 15 ACKTimeOut(us): 56 CTSTimeOut(us): 56 AP(if-wireless 0)#
long-distance slottime This command sets the slot time for long-distance communications. Syntax long-distance slottime <time>
time - The adjusted slot time in microseconds. Default 9 microseconds 223 Chapter 24 | Wireless Interface Commands Command Mode Interface Configuration (Wireless) Example AP(if-wireless 0)# long-distance slottime 25 For making changes effective, please execute make-RF-setting-effective command after entering all three long distance parameters!
AP(if-wireless 0)#
long-distance acktimeout This command sets the acknowledge timeout for long-distance communications. Syntax long-distance acktimeout <timeout>
timeout - The adjusted acknowledge timeout in microseconds. Default 64 microseconds Command Mode Interface Configuration (Wireless) Example AP(if-wireless 0)# long-distance acktimeout 56 For making changes effective, please execute make-RF-setting-effective command after entering all three long distance parameters!
AP(if-wireless 0)#
long-distance ctstimeout This command sets the CTS (clear to send) timeout for long-distance communications. Syntax long-distance ctstimeout <timeout>
timeout - The adjusted CTS timeout in microseconds. Default 48 microseconds Command Mode Interface Configuration (Wireless) 224 Chapter 24 | Wireless Interface Commands Example AP(if-wireless 0)# long-distance ctstimeout 56 For making changes effective, please execute make-RF-setting-effective command after entering all three long distance parameters!
AP(if-wireless 0)#
bandwidth-control downlink This command enables the downlink bandwidth control for a VAP interface. Syntax bandwidth-control downlink <enable | disable>
enable - Enables the downlink bandwidth control setting. disable - Disables the feature. Default Disabled Command Mode Interface Configuration (Wireless-VAP) Command Usage This command enables the rate limiting of traffic from the wired network as it is passed to the VAP interface. You can set a maximum rate in Kbytes per second. Example AP(if-wireless 0: VAP[0])# bandwidth-control downlink enable This setting has not been effective !
If want to take effect, please execute make-security-effective command !
AP(if-wireless 0: VAP[0])#
bandwidth-control downlink rate This command sets the downlink bandwidth rate for a VAP interface. Syntax bandwidth-control downlink rate <rate>
rate - The allowed downlink rate in Kbytes per second.
(Range: 100-12000 Kbytes per second) Default 100 Kbytes per second Command Mode Interface Configuration (Wireless-VAP) 225 Chapter 24 | Wireless Interface Commands Example AP(if-wireless 0: VAP[0])# bandwidth-control downlink rate 512 This setting has not been effective !
If want to take effect, please execute make-security-effective command !
AP(if-wireless 0: VAP[0])#
bandwidth-control uplink This command enables the uplink bandwidth control for a VAP interface. Syntax bandwidth-control uplink <enable | disable>
enable - Enables the uplink bandwidth control setting. disable - Disables the feature. Default Disabled Command Mode Interface Configuration (Wireless-VAP) Command Usage This command enables the rate limiting of traffic from the VAP interface as it is passed to the wired network. You can set a maximum rate in Kbytes per second. Example AP(if-wireless 0: VAP[0])# bandwidth-control uplink enable This setting has not been effective !
If want to take effect, please execute make-security-effective command !
AP(if-wireless 0: VAP[0])#
bandwidth-control uplink rate This command sets the uplink bandwidth rate for a VAP interface. Syntax bandwidth-control uplink rate <rate>
rate - The allowed uplink rate in Kbytes per second.
(Range: 100-12000 Kbytes per second) Default 100 Kbytes per second 226 Chapter 24 | Wireless Interface Commands Command Mode Interface Configuration (Wireless-VAP) Example AP(if-wireless 0: VAP[0])# bandwidth-control uplink rate 512 This setting has not been effective !
If want to take effect, please execute make-security-effective command !
AP(if-wireless 0: VAP[0])#
show interface wireless This command displays the status for a specified VAP interface. Syntax show interface wireless <index> vap <vap-index>
index - The wireless interface slot number. (Range: 0 or 1) vap-index - The number that identifies a VAP interface.
(Options: 0-15) Command Mode Exec Example AP# show interface wireless 0 vap 0
----------------------------------Basic Setting----------------------------
SSID : EAP9112A_11BGN_0 Wireless Network Mode : 11ng Auto Channel Select : DISABLE Channel : 6 High Throughput Mode : HT20 Status : ENABLE VLAN-ID : 1 Dhcp-Relay Server Ip : 0.0.0.0
------------------------------------Capacity--------------------------------
Maximum Association Client Per Vap : 16 Clients Maximum Association Client Per Radio : 127 Clients
--------------------------------802.11 Parameters---------------------------
Transmit Power : 100%(20 dBm) Preamble Length : Short-or-Long Fragmentation Threshold : 2346 RTS Threshold : 2346 Beacon Interval : 100 Authentication Timeout Interval : 3 Mins Association Timeout Interval : 5 Mins DTIM Interval : 1 Short Guard Interval Status : Disabled A-MPDU Status : Enabled A-MPDU Length Limit : 65535 Bytes A-MSDU Status : Enabled
------------------------------------Security--------------------------------
Closed System : DISABLE 227 Chapter 24 | Wireless Interface Commands WPA Function : OPEN-SYSTEM, WPA FUNCTION DISABLE WPA PSK Key Type : ascii WPA PSK Key : ********
Default Transmit Key : 1 Static WEP Keys Key 1 : *****
Key 2 : *****
Key 3 : *****
Key 4 : *****
Pre-Authentication : DISABLE
-------------------------------------802.1x---------------------------------
802.1x : DISABLE 802.1x Reauthentication Time Value : 3600 seconds
----------------------Bandwidth Control for Uplink/Downlink------------------
Bandwidth Control for Uplink : DISABLE Bandwidth Control for Uplink rate : 100 Kbyte/s Bandwidth Control for Downlink : DISABLE Bandwidth Control for Downlink rate : 100 Kbyte/s
-------------------------------Qos Mapping-------------------------------
Qos Mapping for vap to 802.1p : DISABLE User Priority for vap to 802.1p : 0 Qos Mapping for 802.1d to 802.1p : DISABLE Template Name for 802.1d to 802.1p : default_up_mapping_1 Template Priority for 802.1d to 802.1p : 01234567 Qos Mapping for 802.1d to DSCP : DISABLE Template Name for 802.1d to DSCP : default_up_mapping_1 Template Priority for 802.1d to DSCP : 01234567
--------------------------------Quality of Service--------------------------
WMM Mode : ENABLED WMM Acknowledge Policy AC0(BE) : Acknowledge AC1(BK) : Acknowledge AC2(VI) : Acknowledge AC3(VO) : Acknowledge WMM AP Parameters:
AC0(BE) CwMin: 4 CwMax: 6 AIFSN: 3 TXOP Limit: 0 AC1(BK) CwMin: 4 CwMax: 10 AIFSN: 7 TXOP Limit: 0 AC2(VI) CwMin: 3 CwMax: 4 AIFSN: 1 TXOP Limit:3008 AC3(VO) CwMin: 2 CwMax: 3 AIFSN: 1 TXOP Limit:1504 WMM BSS Parameters:
AC0(BE) CwMin: 4 CwMax: 10 AIFSN: 3 TXOP Limit: 0 ACM:Disabled AC1(BK) CwMin: 4 CwMax: 10 AIFSN: 7 TXOP Limit: 0 ACM:Disabled AC2(VI) CwMin: 3 CwMax: 4 AIFSN: 2 TXOP Limit:3008 ACM:Disabled AC3(VO) CwMin: 2 CwMax: 3 AIFSN: 2 TXOP Limit:1504 ACM:Disabled AP#
show station This command shows the wireless clients associated with the access point. Command Mode Exec Example AP#show station 228 Chapter 24 | Wireless Interface Commands Station Table Information
Wireless Interface 0 VAPs List:
if-wireless 0 VAP [0] :
ADDR RSSI Tx(Mbps) Rx(Mbps) IP Privacy Authentication fc:25:3f:70:1a:4f 22 0M 6M 0.0.0.0 off Open fc:25:3f:5c:32:49 20 0M 13M 0.0.0.0 off Open if-wireless 0 VAP [1] :
if-wireless 0 VAP [2] :
if-wireless 0 VAP [3] :
if-wireless 0 VAP [4] :
if-wireless 0 VAP [5] :
if-wireless 0 VAP [6] :
if-wireless 0 VAP [7] :
if-wireless 0 VAP [8] :
if-wireless 0 VAP [9] :
if-wireless 0 VAP [10] :
if-wireless 0 VAP [11] :
if-wireless 0 VAP [12] :
if-wireless 0 VAP [13] :
if-wireless 0 VAP [14] :
if-wireless 0 VAP [15] :
Wireless Interface 1 VAPs List:
if-wireless 1 VAP [0] :
if-wireless 1 VAP [1] :
if-wireless 1 VAP [2] :
if-wireless 1 VAP [3] :
if-wireless 1 VAP [4] :
if-wireless 1 VAP [5] :
if-wireless 1 VAP [6] :
if-wireless 1 VAP [7] :
if-wireless 1 VAP [8] :
if-wireless 1 VAP [9] :
if-wireless 1 VAP [10] :
if-wireless 1 VAP [11] :
if-wireless 1 VAP [12] :
if-wireless 1 VAP [13] :
if-wireless 1 VAP [14] :
if-wireless 1 VAP [15] :
AP#
show station statistics This command shows statistics information for wireless clients associated with the access point. Command Mode Exec 229 Chapter 24 | Wireless Interface Commands Example AP#show station statistics Station Table Information
Wireless Interface 0 VAPs List:
if-wireless 0 VAP [0] :
Total Station Number of this vap: 0 if-wireless 0 VAP [1] :
Total Station Number of this vap: 0 if-wireless 0 VAP [2] :
Total Station Number of this vap: 0 if-wireless 0 VAP [3] :
Total Station Number of this vap: 0 if-wireless 0 VAP [4] :
Total Station Number of this vap: 0 if-wireless 0 VAP [5] :
Total Station Number of this vap: 0 if-wireless 0 VAP [6] :
Total Station Number of this vap: 0 if-wireless 0 VAP [7] :
Total Station Number of this vap: 0 if-wireless 0 VAP [8] :
Total Station Number of this vap: 0 if-wireless 0 VAP [9] :
Total Station Number of this vap: 0 if-wireless 0 VAP [10] :
Total Station Number of this vap: 0 if-wireless 0 VAP [11] :
Total Station Number of this vap: 0 if-wireless 0 VAP [12] :
Total Station Number of this vap: 0 if-wireless 0 VAP [13] :
Total Station Number of this vap: 0 if-wireless 0 VAP [14] :
Total Station Number of this vap: 0 if-wireless 0 VAP [15] :
Total Station Number of this vap: 0 Wireless Interface 1 VAPs List:
if-wireless 1 VAP [0] :
Total Station Number of this vap: 0 if-wireless 1 VAP [1] :
Total Station Number of this vap: 0 if-wireless 1 VAP [2] :
Total Station Number of this vap: 0 if-wireless 1 VAP [3] :
Total Station Number of this vap: 0 if-wireless 1 VAP [4] :
Total Station Number of this vap: 0 if-wireless 1 VAP [5] :
Total Station Number of this vap: 0 if-wireless 1 VAP [6] :
Total Station Number of this vap: 0 if-wireless 1 VAP [7] :
Total Station Number of this vap: 0 if-wireless 1 VAP [8] :
Total Station Number of this vap: 0 if-wireless 1 VAP [9] :
Total Station Number of this vap: 0 if-wireless 1 VAP [10] :
Total Station Number of this vap: 0 if-wireless 1 VAP [11] :
230 Chapter 24 | Wireless Interface Commands Total Station Number of this vap: 0 if-wireless 1 VAP [12] :
Total Station Number of this vap: 0 if-wireless 1 VAP [13] :
Total Station Number of this vap: 0 if-wireless 1 VAP [14] :
Total Station Number of this vap: 0 if-wireless 1 VAP [15] :
Total Station Number of this vap: 0
Total Station Number of this device: 0 Total Station Number of Radio 0: 0 Total Station Number of Radio 1: 0
AP#
231 25 Wireless Security Commands The commands described in this section configure parameters for wireless security on the VAP interfaces. Table 21: Wireless Security Commands Command auth encryption key transmit-key cipher-suite Function Mode Page Defines the 802.11 authentication type allowed by the access point IC-W-
VAP Defines whether or not WEP encryption is used to provide privacy for wireless communications Sets the keys used for WEP encryption Sets the index of the key to be used for encrypting data frames sent between the access point and wireless clients IC-W-
VAP IC-W IC-W-
VAP Selects an encryption method for the global key used for multicast and broadcast traffic IC-W-
VAP wpa-pre-shared-key Defines a WPA preshared-key value pmksa-lifetime Sets the lifetime PMK security associations make-security-effective Implements wireless security changes made in current CLI session IC-W-
VAP IC-W-
VAP IC-W-
VAP auth This command configures authentication for the VAP interface. Syntax 235 234 235 236 237 238 239 239 auth <open-system | shared-key | wpa | wpa-psk | wpa2 | wpa2-psk | wpa-
wpa2-mixed | wpa-wpa2-psk-mixed>
open-system - Accepts the client without verifying its identity using a shared key. Open authentication means either there is no encryption (if encryption is disabled) or WEP-only encryption is used (if encryption is enabled). shared-key - Authentication is based on a WEP shared key that has been distributed to all stations. wpa - Clients using WPA are accepted for authentication. wpa-psk - Clients using WPA with a Pre-shared Key are accepted for authentication. wpa2 - Clients using WPA2 are accepted for authentication. 232 Chapter 25 | Wireless Security Commands wpa2-psk - Clients using WPA2 with a Pre-shared Key are accepted for authentication. wpa-wpa2-mixed - Clients using WPA or WPA2 are accepted for authentication. wpa-wpa2-psk-mixed - Clients using WPA or WPA2 with a Pre-shared Key are accepted for authentication Default Setting open-system Command Mode Interface Configuration (Wireless-VAP) Command Usage The auth command automatically configures settings for each authentication type, including encryption, 802.1X, and cipher suite. The command auth open-
system disables encryption and 802.1X. To use WEP shared-key authentication, set the authentication type to shared-
key and define at least one static WEP key with the key command. Encryption is automatically enabled by the command. To use WEP encryption only (no authentication), set the authentication type to open-system. Then enable WEP with the encryption command, and define at least one static WEP key with the key command. When any WPA or WPA2 option is selected, clients are authenticated using 802.1X via a RADIUS server. Each client must be WPA-enabled or support 802.1X client software. The 802.1X settings (see 802.1X Authentication Commands on page 173) and RADIUS server details (see RADIUS Client Commands on page 167) must be configured on the access point. A RADIUS server must also be configured and be available in the wired network. If a WPA/WPA2 mode that operates over 802.1X is selected (WPA, WPA2, WPA-
WPA2-mixed, or WPA-WPA2-PSK-mixed), the 802.1X settings (see 802.1X Authentication Commands on page 173) and RADIUS server details (see RADIUS Client Commands on page 167) must be configured. Be sure you have also configured a RADIUS server on the network before enabling authentication. Also, note that each client has to be WPA-enabled or support 802.1X client software. A RADIUS server must also be configured and be available in the wired network. If a WPA/WPA2 Pre-shared Key mode is selected (WPA-PSK, WPA2-PSK or WPA-
WPA2-PSK-mixed), the key must first be generated and distributed to all wireless clients before they can successfully associate with the access point. Use the wpa-preshared-key command to configure the key (see key on page 235 and transmit-key on page 236). 233 Chapter 25 | Wireless Security Commands WPA2 defines a transitional mode of operation for networks moving from WPA security to WPA2. WPA2 Mixed Mode allows both WPA and WPA2 clients to associate to a common VAP interface. When the encryption cipher suite is set to TKIP, the unicast encryption cipher (TKIP or AES-CCMP) is negotiated for each client. The access point advertises its supported encryption ciphers in beacon frames and probe responses. WPA and WPA2 clients select the cipher they support and return the choice in the association request to the access point. For mixed-mode operation, the cipher used for broadcast frames is always TKIP. WEP encryption is not allowed. Example AP(if-wireless 0: VAP[0])# auth wpa-psk AP(if-wireless 0: VAP[0])#
Related Commands encryption key encryption This command enables data encryption for wireless communications. Use the no form to disable data encryption. Syntax
[no] encryption Default Setting disabled Command Mode Interface Configuration (Wireless-VAP) Command Usage Selecting a security method using the auth command, automatically enables data encryption (WEP, TKIP, or AES-CCMP) for the VAP. Only use this command when using WEP encryption with an Open System. Encryption is implemented in this device to prevent unauthorized access to your wireless network. For more secure data transmissions, enable encryption by selecting a security method using the auth command, or by using the encryption command when using WEP encryption only. The encryption settings must be the same on each client in your wireless network. Note that encryption protects data transmitted between wireless nodes, but does not protect any transmissions over your wired network or over the Internet. 234 Chapter 25 | Wireless Security Commands Example AP(if-wireless 0: VAP[0])# encryption This setting has not been effective !
If want to take effect, please execute make-security-effective command !
AP(if-wireless 0: VAP[0])#
Related Commands key key This command sets the keys used for WEP encryption. Use the no form to delete a configured key. Syntax key {<index> <size> <type> <value> | static | dynamic}
no key <index>
index - Key index. (Range: 1-4) size - Key size. (Options: 64 or 128 bits) type - Input format. (Options: ASCII, HEX) value - The key string. For 64-bit keys, use 5 alphanumeric characters or 10 hexadecimal digits. For 128-bit keys, use 13 alphanumeric characters or 26 hexadecimal digits. static - Uses static WEP keys with 802.1X authentication. dynamic - When using 802.1X authentication, allows WEP keys to be dynamically generated by the RADIUS server. Default Setting None Command Mode Interface Configuration (Wireless-VAP) Command Usage To enable WEP, use the auth shared-key command to select the shared key authentication type, use the key command to configure at least one key, and then use the transmit-key command to select a key to use. If WEP is enabled, all wireless clients must be configured with the same shared keys to communicate with the VAP. 235 Chapter 25 | Wireless Security Commands The WEP key index, length and type configured for the VAP must match those configured for clients. Example AP(if-wireless 0: VAP[0])# key 1 64 hex 1234512345 This setting has not been effective !
If want to take effect, please execute make-security-effective command !
AP(if-wireless 0: VAP[0])#
Related Commands key encryption transmit-key transmit-key This command sets the index of the WEP key to be used for encrypting data frames transmitted from the VAP to wireless clients. Syntax transmit-key <index>
index - Key index. (Range: 1-4) Default Setting 1 Command Mode Interface Configuration (Wireless-VAP) Command Usage If you use WEP key encryption option, the access point uses the transmit key to encrypt multicast and broadcast data signals that it sends to client devices. Other keys can be used for decryption of data from clients. When using dynamic keys with 802.1X, the access point uses a dynamic key to encrypt unicast and broadcast messages to 802.1X-enabled clients. However, because the access point sends the keys during the 802.1X authentication process, these keys do not have to appear in the clients key list. Example AP(if-wireless 0: VAP[0])# transmit-key 1 This setting has not been effective !
If want to take effect, please execute make-security-effective command !
AP(if-wireless 0: VAP[0])#
236 Chapter 25 | Wireless Security Commands cipher-suite This command defines the cipher algorithm used to encrypt the global key for broadcast and multicast traffic when using WPA or WPA2 security. Syntax multicast-cipher <aes-ccmp | tkip >
aes-ccmp - Use AES-CCMP encryption for the unicast and multicast cipher. tkip - Use TKIP encryption for the multicast cipher. TKIP or AES-CCMP can be used for the unicast cipher depending on the capability of the client. Default Setting None Command Mode Interface Configuration (Wireless-VAP) Command Usage WPA and WPA2 enable a VAP to support different unicast encryption keys for each client. However, the global encryption key for multicast and broadcast traffic must be the same for all clients. TKIP provides data encryption enhancements including per-packet key hashing (i.e., changing the encryption key on each packet), a message integrity check, an extended initialization vector with sequencing rules, and a re-keying mechanism. Select TKIP if there are clients in the network that are not WPA2 compliant. TKIP defends against attacks on WEP in which the unencrypted initialization vector in encrypted packets is used to calculate the WEP key. TKIP changes the encryption key on each packet, and rotates not just the unicast keys, but the broadcast keys as well. TKIP is a replacement for WEP that removes the predictability that intruders relied on to determine the WEP key. AES-CCMP (Advanced Encryption Standard Counter-Mode/CBCMAC Protocol):
WPA2 is backward compatible with WPA, including the same 802.1X and PSK modes of operation and support for TKIP encryption. The main enhancement is its use of AES Counter-Mode encryption with Cipher Block Chaining Message Authentication Code (CBC-MAC) for message integrity. The AES Counter-Mode/
CBCMAC Protocol (AES-CCMP) provides extremely robust data confidentiality using a 128-bit key. The AES-CCMP encryption cipher is specified as a standard requirement for WPA2. However, the computational intensive operations of AES-CCMP requires hardware support on client devices. Therefore to implement WPA2 in the network, wireless clients must be upgraded to WPA2-
compliant hardware. 237 Chapter 25 | Wireless Security Commands Example AP(if-wireless 0: VAP[0])# cipher-suite tkip This setting has not been effective !
If want to take effect, please execute make-security-effective command !
AP(if-wireless 0: VAP[0])#
wpa-pre-shared-key This command defines a Wi-Fi Protected Access (WPA/WPA2) Pre-shared-key. Syntax wpa-pre-shared-key <hex | passphrase-key> <value>
hex - Specifies hexadecimal digits as the key input format. passphrase-key - Specifies an ASCII pass-phrase string as the key input format. value - The key string. For ASCII input, specify a string between 8 and 63 characters. For HEX input, specify exactly 64 digits. Command Mode Interface Configuration (Wireless-VAP) Command Usage To support WPA or WPA2 for client authentication, use the auth command to specify the authentication type, and use the wpa-preshared-key command to specify one static key. If WPA or WPA2 is used with pre-shared-key mode, all wireless clients must be configured with the same pre-shared key to communicate with the access points VAP interface. Example AP(if-wireless 0: VAP[0])# wpa-pre-shared-key passphrase-key agoodsecret This setting has not been effective !
If want to take effect, please execute make-security-effective command !
AP(if-wireless 0: VAP[0])#
Related Commands auth 238 Chapter 25 | Wireless Security Commands pmksa-lifetime This command sets the time for aging out cached WPA2 Pairwise Master Key Security Association (PMKSA) information for fast roaming. Syntax pmksa-lifetime <minutes>
minutes - The time for aging out PMKSA information.
(Range: 0 - 14400 minutes) Default Setting 720 minutes Command Mode Interface Configuration (Wireless-VAP) Command Usage WPA2 provides fast roaming for authenticated clients by retaining keys and other security information in a cache, so that if a client roams away from an access point and then returns reauthentication is not required. When a WPA2 client is first authenticated, it receives a Pairwise Master Key
(PMK) that is used to generate other keys for unicast data encryption. This key and other client information form a Security Association that the access point names and holds in a cache. The lifetime of this security association can be configured with this command. When the lifetime expires, the client security association and keys are deleted from the cache. If the client returns to the access point, it requires full reauthentication. Example AP(if-wireless 0: VAP[0])# pmksa-lifetime 600 This setting has not been effective !
If want to take effect, please execute make-security-effective command !
AP(if-wireless 0: VAP[0])#
make-security-
effective This command implements all wireless security changes made in the current CLI session. Syntax make-security-effective Default Setting None Command Mode Interface Configuration (Wireless-VAP) 239 Chapter 25 | Wireless Security Commands Example AP(if-wireless 0: VAP[0])# make-security-effective It will take several minutes !
Please wait a while... device eth0 left promiscuous mode br0: port 1(eth0) entering disabled state br0: port 3(ath16) entering disabled state br0: port 2(ath0) entering disabled state device ath16 left promiscuous mode br0: port 3(ath16) entering disabled state device ath0 left promiscuous mode br0: port 2(ath0) entering disabled state wlan_vap_delete : enter. vaphandle=0x879a2000 wlan_vap_delete : exit. vaphandle=0x879a2000 wlan_vap_delete : enter. vaphandle=0x8729c000 wlan_vap_delete : exit. vaphandle=0x8729c000 device eth0 entered promiscuous mode br0: port 1(eth0) entering forwarding state wlan_vap_create : enter. devhandle=0x87ae8300, opmode=IEEE80211_M_HOSTAP, flags=0x1 wlan_vap_create : exit. devhandle=0x87ae8300, opmode=IEEE80211_M_HOSTAP, flags=0x1. VAP device ath0 created Setting Max Stations:17 DES SSID SET=EAP9112A_11BGN_0 ieee80211_ioctl_siwmode: imr.ifm_active=393856, new mode=3, valid=1 wlan_vap_create : enter. devhandle=0x87048300, opmode=IEEE80211_M_HOSTAP, flags=0x1 wlan_vap_create : exit. devhandle=0x87048300, opmode=IEEE80211_M_HOSTAP, flags=0x1. VAP device ath16 created Setting Max Stations:17 DES SSID SET=EAP9112A_11NA_0 ieee80211_ioctl_siwmode: imr.ifm_active=328320, new mode=3, valid=1 device ath0 entered promiscuous mode br0: port 2(ath0) entering forwarding state device ath16 entered promiscuous mode br0: port 3(ath16) entering forwarding state AP(if-wireless 0: VAP[0])#
240 26 Rogue AP Detection Commands A rogue AP is either an access point that is not authorized to participate in the wireless network, or an access point that does not have the correct security configuration. Rogue APs can potentially allow unauthorized users access to the network. Alternatively, client stations may mistakenly associate to a rogue AP and be prevented from accessing network resources. Rogue APs may also cause radio interference and degrade the wireless LAN performance. The access point can be configured to periodically scan all radio channels and find other access points within range. A database of access points is maintained so that any rogue APs can be identified. Table 22: Rogue AP Detection Commands Command Function Mode rogue-ap enable rogue-ap disable Enables the periodic detection of other nearby access points Disables the periodic detection of other nearby access points rogue-ap add friendly Configures a database of known AP MAC addresses rogue-ap delete friendly Removes AP MAC addresses from the database rogue-ap duration Sets the duration that all channels are scanned rogue-ap interval Sets the time between each scan rogue-ap instant-scan Forces an immediate scan of all radio channels GC GC GC GC GC GC GC show rogue-ap Shows the current database of detected access points Exec Page 241 242 242 243 243 244 245 245 rogue-ap enable This command enables the periodic detection of nearby access points. Syntax rogue-ap enable Default Setting Disabled Command Mode Interface Configuration (Wireless) 241 Chapter 26 | Rogue AP Detection Commands Command Usage While the access point scans a channel for rogue APs, wireless clients will not be able to connect to the access point. Therefore, avoid frequent scanning or scans of a long duration unless there is a reason to believe that more intensive scanning is required to find a rogue AP. A rogue AP is either an access point that is not authorized to participate in the wireless network, or an access point that does not have the correct security configuration. Rogue access points can be identified by unknown BSSID (MAC address). A database of nearby access points should therefore be maintained on the AP, allowing any rogue APs to be identified (see rogue-ap add friendly). The rogue AP database can be viewed using the show rogue-ap command. Example AP(if-wireless 0)#rogue-ap enable If want to take effect, please execute make-RF-setting-effective command !
AP(if-wireless 0)#
rogue-ap disable This command disables the periodic detection of nearby access points. Syntax rogue-ap disable Default Setting Disabled Command Mode Interface Configuration (Wireless) Example AP(if-wireless 0)#rogue-ap disable If want to take effect, please execute make-RF-setting-effective command !
AP(if-wireless 0)#
rogue-ap add friendly This command adds MAC addresses of known APs in the network to a local databaseon the AP on the network. Syntax rogue-ap add friendly <mac-address>
mac-address - A known AP MAC address. Default Setting None 242 Chapter 26 | Rogue AP Detection Commands Command Mode Interface Configuration (Wireless) Command Usage Enter the MAC address/Basic Service Set Identifier (BSSID) of known APs in the network. These MAC addresses will be filtered out of the list of detected APs during a scan. Building a database of approved APs allows the AP to discover rogue APs. Without a configured database, the AP can detect neighboring APs only, it cannot identify whether the APs are rogues. Example AP(if-wireless 0)#rogue-ap add friendly 00-12-34-56-78-9a AP(if-wireless 0)#
rogue-ap delete friendly This command removes MAC addresses from the database of known APs. Syntax rogue-ap delete friendly <mac-address | all>
mac-address - Removes the specified MAC address. all - Removes all AP MAC address from the database. Default Setting None Command Mode Interface Configuration (Wireless) Example AP(if-wireless 0)#rogue-ap delete friendly 00-12-34-56-78-9a AP(if-wireless 0)#
rogue-ap duration This command sets the scan duration for detecting access points. Syntax rogue-ap duration <milliseconds>
milliseconds - The duration of the scan. (Range: 10-150 milliseconds) Default Setting 150 milliseconds 243 Chapter 26 | Rogue AP Detection Commands Command Mode Interface Configuration (Wireless) Command Usage During a scan, client access may be disrupted and new clients may not be able to associate to the access point. If clients experience severe disruption, reduce the scan duration time. A long scan duration time will detect more access points in the area, but causes more disruption to client access. Example AP(if-wireless 0)#rogue-ap duration 200 AP(if-wireless 0)#
Related Commands rogue-ap interval (244) rogue-ap interval This command sets the interval at which to scan for access points. Syntax rogue-ap interval <seconds>
seconds - The interval between consecutive scans. (Range: 15-65535 seconds) Default Setting 7200 seconds Command Mode Interface Configuration (Wireless) Command Usage This command sets the interval at which scans occur. Frequent scanning will more readily detect other access points, but will cause more disruption to client access. Example AP(if-wireless 0)#rogue-ap interval 120 AP(if-wireless 0)#
Related Commands rogue-ap duration (243) 244 Chapter 26 | Rogue AP Detection Commands rogue-ap instant-scan This command starts an immediate scan for access points on the radio interface. Default Setting Disabled Command Mode Interface Configuration (Wireless) Command Usage While the access point scans a channel for rogue APs, wireless clients will not be able to connect to the access point. Therefore, avoid frequent scanning or scans of a long duration unless there is a reason to believe that more intensive scanning is required to find a rogue AP. Example AP(if-wireless 0)#rogue-ap scan AP(if-wireless 0)#
show rogue-ap This command displays the current rogue AP configuration and the databases of known and rogue APs. Syntax show rogue-ap <config | table>
config - Displays the current rogue AP configuration. table - Displays the database of known and rogue APs after scanning. Command Mode Exec Example AP#show rogue-ap config Rogue AP Config Information
Radio 0 Rogue AP scan Status: Enabled AP Scan Interval : 7200 seconds AP Scan Duration : 150 milliseconds AP First Scan Delay : 0 seconds Radio 1 Rogue AP scan Status: Disabled AP Scan Interval : 7200 seconds AP Scan Duration : 150 milliseconds AP First Scan Delay : 0 seconds
AP#
245 Chapter 26 | Rogue AP Detection Commands 246 27 Link Integrity Commands The access point provides a link integrity feature that can be used to ensure that wireless clients are connected to resources on the wired network. The access point does this by periodically sending Ping messages to a host device in the wired Ethernet network. If the access point detects that the connection to the host has failed, it disables the radio interfaces, forcing clients to find and associate with another access point. When the connection to the host is restored, the access point re-enables the radio interfaces. Table 23: Link Integrity Commands Command link-integrity Function Enables link integrity detection and specifies the IP address of a host device in the wired network link-integrity link-fail-action Sets the link fail action show link-integrity Displays the current link integrity configuration Mode GC Page 247 GC Exec 248 249 link-integrity This command enables link integrity detection and configures the IP address, detect interval, response timeout, and retry count for the link integrity host test. Use the no form to disable link integrity detection. Syntax link-integrity [<ip_address> interval <interval> timeout <timeout>
retry <retry>]
no link-integrity ip_address - IP address of the host. interval - The interval time between each Ping sent to the host.
(Range: 10-86400 seconds) timeout - The time to wait for a response to a Ping message.
(Range: 1-10 seconds) retry - The number of consecutive failed Ping counts before the link is determined as lost. (Range: 1-99) Default Setting Status: Disabled Host IP Address: 192.168.2.254 Detect Interval: 60 seconds 247 Chapter 27 | Link Integrity Commands Response Timeout: 2 seconds Retry Counts: 5 Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage When link integrity is enabled, the IP address of a host device in the wired network must be specified. The access point periodically sends an ICMP echo request (Ping) packet to the link host IP address. When the number of failed responses (either the host does not respond or is unreachable) exceeds the limit set by this command, the link is determined as lost. The link-integrity link-fail-action command can be used to disable radio interfaces when the host link is lost. The AP continues to send Ping messages to determine if the link to the host is restored. When the connection to the host is restored, the access point re-
enables the radio interfaces if they have been shut down. Example AP(config)#link-integrity 10.20.30.40 interval 500 timeout 5 retry 3 AP(config)#link-integrity AP(config)#
link-integrity link-fail-
action This command configures the fail action for a link integrity test. Syntax link-integrity link-fail-action <radio> <enable | disable>
radio - The radio interface, 2.4 GHz (0) or 5 GHz (1). (Options: 0 or 1) enable - Enables the link fail action to shut down radio interfaces. disable - Disables the link fail action. Default Setting Disabled Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage When the host link is determined to be lost, one or both radio interfaces can be disabled. The AP continues to send Ping messages to determine if the link to the host is restored. When the connection to the host is restored, the AP re-enables the radio interfaces if they have been shut down. 248 Chapter 27 | Link Integrity Commands Example AP(config)# link-integrity link-fail-action 0 enable AP(config)#
show link-integrity This command displays the current link integrity configuration. Command Mode Exec Example AP#show link-integrity Link Integrity Information
Link integrity: disabled Destination IP: 192.168.2.254 Detect Interval: 60 Response Timeout: 2 Retry Count if no response: 5 Link fail action - Shutdown Radio 0: disabled Link fail action - Shutdown Radio 1: disabled AP#
249 28 Link Layer Discovery Commands LLDP allows devices in the local broadcast domain to share information about themselves. LLDP-capable devices periodically transmit information in messages called Type Length Value (TLV) fields to neighbor devices. Advertised information is represented in Type Length Value (TLV) format according to the IEEE 802.1ab standard, and can include details such as device identification, capabilities and configuration settings. This information can be used by SNMP applications to simplify troubleshooting, enhance network management, and maintain an accurate network topology. Table 24: Link Layer Discovery Commands Command lldp service Function Mode Page Enables the transmission of LLDP information lldp transmit hold-muliplier Sets the message transmission hold time lldp transmit interval Sets the message transmission interval time lldp transmit re-init-delay Sets the reinitial delay time lldp transmit delay-to-local-
change Sets the transmission delay value show lldp Shows the current LLDP information Exec GC GC GC GC GC 250 251 251 252 252 253 lldp service This command enables LLDP on the access point. Use the no form to disable LLDP. Syntax
[no] lldp service Default Setting Enabled Command Mode Global Configuration Example AP(config)# lldp service AP(config)#
250 Chapter 28 | Link Layer Discovery Commands lldp-transmit hold-
muliplier This command configures the time-to-live (TTL) value sent in LLDP advertisements. Syntax lldp transmit hold-multiplier <multiplier>
multiplier - The hold multiplier number. (Range: 2-10) Default Setting 4 Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage This command configures the time-to-live (TTL) value sent in LLDP advertisements as shown in the following formula:
(Transmission Interval * Hold time) 65536 Therefore, the default TTL is 4*30 = 120 seconds. The time-to-live tells the receiving LLDP agent how long to retain all information pertaining to the sending LLDP agent if it does not transmit updates in a timely manner. Example AP(config)# lldp transmit hold-multiplier 6 AP(config)#
lldp transmit interval This command configures the periodic transmit interval for LLDP advertisements. Syntax lldp transmit interval <interval>
interval - The time between LLDP advertisements.
(Range: 5-32768 seconds) Default Setting 30 seconds Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage This command configures the periodic transmit interval for LLDP advertisements. This parameter must comply with the following rule:
(Transmission Interval * Hold Time) 65536, and Transmission Interval >= (4 * Delay Interval) 251 Chapter 28 | Link Layer Discovery Commands Example AP(config)# lldp transmit interval 30 AP(config)#
lldp transmit re-init-
delay This command configures the delay before attempting to re-initialize after LLDP ports are disabled or the link goes down. Syntax lldp transmit re-init-delay <seconds>
seconds - Time in seconds. (Range: 2 - 10) Default Setting 2 seconds Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage This command configures the delay before attempting to re-initialize after LLDP ports are disabled or the link goes down. When LLDP is re-initialized on a port, all information in the remote systems LLDP MIB associated with this port is deleted. Example AP(config)#lldp transmit re-init-delay 10 AP(config)#
lldp transmit delay-to-
local-change This command configures a delay between the successive transmission of LLDP advertisements initiated by a change in local LLDP MIB variables. Syntax lldp transmit delay-to-local-change <seconds>
seconds - Time in seconds. (Range: 1-8192 seconds) Default Setting 2 seconds Command Mode Global Configuration 252 Chapter 28 | Link Layer Discovery Commands Command Usage The transmit delay is used to prevent a series of successive LLDP transmissions during a short period of rapid changes in local LLDP MIB objects, and to increase the probability that multiple, rather than single changes, are reported in each transmission. This attribute must comply with the rule: (4 * Delay Interval) Transmission Interval Example AP(config)# lldp transmit delay-to-local-change 10 txDelay range is 1 to quter of msgTxInterval AP(config)#
show lldp This command displays the current LLDP configuration. Command Mode Exec Example AP# show lldp LLDP Information
Status :Enabled Message Transmission Hold Time :5 Message Transmission Interval (seconds) :30 Reinitial Delay Time (seconds) :2 Transmission Delay Value (seconds) :2
AP#
253 29 VLAN Commands The access point can enable the support of VLAN-tagged traffic passing between wireless clients and the wired network. VLAN IDs can be mapped to specific VAP interfaces, allowing users to remain within the same VLAN as they move around a campus site. Caution: When VLANs are enabled, the access points Ethernet port drops all received traffic that does not include a VLAN tag. To maintain network connectivity to the access point and wireless clients, be sure that the access point is connected to a device port on a wired network that supports IEEE 802.1Q VLAN tags. The VLAN commands supported by the access point are listed below. Table 25: VLAN Commands Command Function vlan Enables a single VLAN for all traffic management-vlanid Configures the management VLAN for the access point native-vlanid Configures the default VLAN for the LAN port vlan-id Configures the default VLAN for the VAP interface Mode Page GC GC GC IC-W-
VAP 254 255 256 256 vlan This command enables VLANs for all traffic. Use the no form to disable VLANs. Syntax vlan enabled no vlan Default Disabled Command Mode Global Configuration Command Description When VLANs are enabled, the access point tags frames received from wireless clients with the VAPs default VLAN ID. 254 Chapter 29 | VLAN Commands Traffic entering the Ethernet port must be tagged with a VLAN ID that matches the access points management VLAN ID, or with a VLAN tag that matches one of the VAP default VLAN IDs. Example AP(config)# vlan enabled Warning! VLAN's status has been changed now !
It will take several seconds !
Please wait a while... AP(config)#
Related Commands management-vlanid management-vlanid This command configures the management VLAN ID for the access point. Syntax management-vlanid <vlan-id>
vlan-id - Management VLAN ID. (Range: 1-4094) Default Setting 4093 Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage The management VLAN is for managing the access point. For example, the access point allows traffic that is tagged with the specified VLAN to manage the access point through remote management, SNMP, Telnet, SSH, etc. Example AP(config)# management-vlanid 3 Warning! VLAN's structure is re-created now !
It will take several seconds !
Please wait a while... AP(config)#
Related Commands vlan 255 Chapter 29 | VLAN Commands native-vlanid This command configures the default VLAN ID for the LAN port interface. Syntax native-vlanid <vlan-id>
vlan-id - Default VLAN ID. (Range: 1-4094) Default Setting 1 Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage To implement the default VLAN ID setting for the LAN port, the AP must first enable VLAN support using the vlan command. When VLANs are enabled, the AP assigns the default VLAN ID to untagged frames received on the LAN port interface. Example AP(config)# native-vlanid 123 Warning! VLAN's structure is re-created now !
It will take several seconds !
Please wait a while... AP(config)#
vlan-id This command configures the default VLAN ID for the VAP interface. Syntax vlan-id <vlan-id>
vlan-id - Default VLAN ID. (Range: 1-4094) Default Setting 1 Command Mode Interface Configuration (Wireless-VAP) Command Usage To implement the default VLAN ID setting for VAP interface, the access point must enable VLAN support using the vlan command. 256 Chapter 29 | VLAN Commands When VLANs are enabled, the access point tags frames received from wireless clients with the default VLAN ID for the VAP interface. Example AP(if-wireless 0: VAP[0])# vlan-ID 6 This setting has not been effective !
If want to take effect, please execute make-security-effective command !
AP(if-wireless 0: VAP[0])#
257 30 WMM Commands The access point implements QoS using the Wi-Fi Multimedia (WMM) standard. Using WMM, the access point is able to prioritize traffic and optimize performance when multiple applications compete for wireless network bandwidth at the same time. WMM employs techniques that are a subset of the IEEE 802.11e QoS standard and it enables the access point to inter-operate with both WMM-enabled clients and other devices that may lack any WMM functionality. Table 26: WMM Commands Command wmm Function Enables WMM on the access point wmm-acknowledge-
policy Allows the acknowledgement wait time to be enabled or disabled for each Access Category (AC) wmmparam Configures detailed WMM parameters that apply to the access point (AP) or the wireless clients (BSS) Mode Page IC-W IC-W IC-W 258 259 259 wmm This command enables WMM on the access point. Use the no form to disable WMM. Syntax wmm required no wmm required - WMM must be supported on any device trying to associated with the access point. Devices that do not support this feature will not be allowed to associate with the access point. Default Disabled Command Mode Interface Configuration (Wireless) Example AP(if-wireless 0)# wmm required This setting has not been effective !
If want to take effect, please execute make-RF-setting-effective command !
AP(if-wireless 0)#
258 Chapter 30 | WMM Commands wmm-acknowledge-
policy This command allows the acknowledgement wait time to be enabled or disabled for each Access Category (AC). Syntax wmm-acknowledge-policy <ac_number> <ack | noack>
ac_number - Access categories. (Range: 0-3) ack - Require the sender to wait for an acknowledgement from the receiver. noack - Does not require the sender to wait for an acknowledgement from the receiver. Default ack Command Mode Interface Configuration (Wireless) Command Usage WMM defines four access categories (ACs) voice, video, best effort, and background. These categories correspond to traffic priority levels and are mapped to IEEE 802.1D priority tags. The direct mapping of the four ACs to 802.1D priorities is specifically intended to facilitate interpretability with other wired network QoS policies. While the four ACs are specified for specific types of traffic, WMM allows the priority levels to be configured to match any network-wide QoS policy. WMM also specifies a protocol that access points can use to communicate the configured traffic priority levels to QoS-enabled wireless clients. Although turning off the requirement for the sender to wait for an acknowledgement can increases data throughput, it can also result in a high number of errors when traffic levels are heavy. Example AP(if-wireless 0)# wmm-acknowledge-Policy 0 noAck This setting has not been effective !
If want to take effect, please execute make-RF-setting-effective command !
AP(if-wireless 0)#
wmmparam This command configures detailed WMM parameters that apply to the access point
(AP) or the wireless clients (BSS). Syntax wmmparam <AP | BSS> <ac_number> <LogCwMin> <LogCwMax> <AIFS>
<TxOpLimit> <admission_control>
259 Chapter 30 | WMM Commands AP - Access Point BSS - Wireless client ac_number - Access categories (ACs) voice, video, best effort, and background. These categories correspond to traffic priority levels and are mapped to IEEE 802.1D priority tags as shown in Table 2 on page 87.
(Range: 0-3) LogCwMin - Minimum log value of the contention window. This is the initial upper limit of the random backoff wait time before wireless medium access can be attempted. The initial wait time is a random value between zero and the LogCwMin value. Specify the LogCwMin value. Note that the LogCwMin value must be equal or less than the LogCwMax value. (Range: 1-
15 microseconds) LogCwMax - Maximum log value of the contention window. This is the maximum upper limit of the random backoff wait time before wireless medium access can be attempted. The contention window is doubled after each detected collision up to the LogCwMax value. Note that the CWMax value must be greater or equal to the LogCwMin value. (Range: 1-
15 microseconds) AIFS - Arbitrary InterFrame Space specifies the minimum amount of wait time before the next data transmission attempt. (Range: 1-
15 microseconds) TXOPLimit - Transmission Opportunity Limit specifies the maximum time an AC transmit queue has access to the wireless medium. When an AC queue is granted a transmit opportunity, it can transmit data for a time up to the TxOpLimit. This data bursting greatly improves the efficiency for high data-rate traffic. (Range: 0-65535 microseconds) admission_control - The admission control mode for the access category. When enabled, clients are blocked from using the access category.
(Options: 0 to disable, 1 to enable) Default Table 27: AP Parameters WMM Parame-
ters AC0 (Best Effort) AC1 (Back-
ground) AC2 (Video) AC3 (Voice) LogCwMin LogCwMax AIFS TXOP Limit 4 10 3 0 4 10 7 0 3 4 2 94 2 3 2 47 Admission Control Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled 260 Chapter 30 | WMM Commands Table 28: BSS Parameters WMM Parame-
ters AC0 (Best Effort) AC1 (Back-
ground) AC2 (Video) AC3 (Voice) LogCwMin LogCwMax AIFS TXOP Limit 4 6 3 0 4 10 7 0 3 4 1 94 2 3 1 47 Admission Control Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Command Mode Interface Configuration (Wireless) Example AP(if-wireless 0)# wmmparam ap 0 5 10 3 64 1 This setting has not been effective !
If want to take effect, please execute make-RF-setting-effective command !
AP(if-wireless 0)#
261 Chapter 30 | WMM Commands 262 31 QoS Commands The QoS commands configure QoS priority mapping for traffic on VAP interfaces. The AP enables Wi-Fi Multimedia (WMM) 802.1d priorities to be mapped to 802.1p priorities or IP DSCP priorities. Table 29: QoS Commands Command Function Mode Page qos vap-802.1p Enables the setting of VAP traffic to a specific 802.1p priority value qos vap-802.1p retagged-user-
priority qos 802.1d-802.1p Sets the 802.1p priority value for VAP traffic Enables the mapping of WMM 802.1d priority values to 802.1p values qos 802.1d-802.1p mapping-template Sets the mapping template for WMM 802.1d to 802.1p priority mapping IC-W VAP IC-W VAP IC-W VAP IC-W VAP qos 802.1d-dscp Enables the mapping of WMM 802.1d priority values to IP DSCP values IC-W VAP qos 802.1d-dscp mapping-template Sets the mapping template for WMM 802.1d to IP DSCP priority mapping qos qos-template qos-
template-name qos qos-template qos-
template-priority qos qos-template qos-
template-show Sets the name for a QoS mapping template Maps priority values in a QoS mapping template Shows the priority mapping in all QoS templates IC-W VAP IC-W VAP IC-W VAP IC-W VAP 263 264 265 265 266 267 268 268 269 qos vap-802.1p This command enables the setting of VAP traffic to a specific 802.1p priority value. Syntax qos vap-802.1p <enable | disable>
enable - Enables the VAP traffic mapping to an 802.1p priority value. disable - Disables the feature. Default Disabled Command Mode Interface Configuration (Wireless-VAP) 263 Chapter 31 | QoS Commands Command Usage To implement this command on a VAP interface the default VLAN ID for the VAP must be set to any other value than 1. The VAP-to-802.1p priority QoS feature cannot be enabled together with the 802.1d-to-802.1p or 802.1d-to-DSCP features. Example AP(if-wireless 0: VAP[0])# qos vap-802.1p enable This setting has not been effective !
If want to take effect, please execute make-security-effective command !
AP(if-wireless 0: VAP[0])#
qos vap-802.1p retagged-user-priority This command sets the 802.1p priority value for all traffic on a VAP interface. Syntax qos vap-802.1p retagged-user-priority <user-priority>
user-priority - The 802.1p priority value for traffic on the VAP interface. Default 0 Command Mode Interface Configuration (Wireless-VAP) Command Usage Requires the QoS feature be enabled using the qos vap-802.1p command. To implement the QoS priority setting on a VAP interface, the default VLAN ID for the VAP must be set to any other value than 1. Example AP(if-wireless 0: VAP[0])# qos vap-802.1p retagged-user-priority 7 This setting has not been effective !
If want to take effect, please execute make-security-effective command !
AP(if-wireless 0: VAP[0])#
264 Chapter 31 | QoS Commands qos 802.1d-802.1p This command enables the mapping of WMM 802.1d priority values to 802.1p values on a VAP interface. Syntax qos 802.1d-802.1p <enable | disable>
enable - Enables the mapping of WMM 802.1d to 802.1p priority values. disable - Disables the feature. Default Disabled Command Mode Interface Configuration (Wireless-VAP) Command Usage This QoS feature requires a QoS mapping template to be configured using the qos qos-template qos-template-priority command. The mapping template can then be linked to the 802.1d-to-802.1p priority mapping using the qos 802.1d-
802.1p mapping-template command. To implement this command on a VAP interface the default VLAN ID for the VAP must be set to any other value than 1. Example AP(if-wireless 0: VAP[0])# qos 802.1d-802.1p enable This setting has not been effective !
If want to take effect, please execute make-security-effective command !
AP(if-wireless 0: VAP[0])#
qos 802.1d-802.1p mapping-template This command sets the mapping template to use for the WMM 802.1d to 802.1p priority mapping on a VAP interface. Syntax qos 802.1d-802.1p mapping-template <template-id>
template-id - The identifying number of a QoS mapping template.
(Range: 1-8) Default 1 Command Mode Interface Configuration (Wireless-VAP) 265 Chapter 31 | QoS Commands Command Usage The AP supports eight QoS priority mapping templates, each identified by an ID number (1 to 8). The templates also have user-defined name that can be configured using the qos qos-template qos-template-name command. The QoS priority mapping templates can be configured using the qos qos-
template qos-template-priority command. Example AP(if-wireless 0: VAP[0])# qos 802.1d-802.1p mapping-template 3 This setting has not been effective !
If want to take effect, please execute make-security-effective command !
AP(if-wireless 0: VAP[0])#
qos 802.1d-dscp This command enables the mapping of WMM 802.1d priority values to IP DSCP values on a VAP interface. Syntax qos 802.1d-dscp <enable | disable>
enable - Enables the mapping of WMM 802.1d to DSCP priority values. disable - Disables the feature. Default Disabled Command Mode Interface Configuration (Wireless-VAP) Command Usage This QoS feature requires a QoS mapping template to be configured using the qos qos-template qos-template-priority command. The mapping template can then be linked to the 802.1d-to-DSCP priority mapping using the qos 802.1d-
dscp mapping-template command. Both 802.1d to 802.1p mapping and 802.1d to DSCP mapping can be enabled simultaneously when the default VLAN ID for the VAP is any other value than 1. When only 802.1d-to-DSCP mapping is enabled, the default VLAN ID for the VAP must be set to 1. Example AP(if-wireless 0: VAP[0])# qos 802.1d-dscp enable This setting has not been effective !
If want to take effect, please execute make-security-effective command !
266 Chapter 31 | QoS Commands AP(if-wireless 0: VAP[0])#
qos 802.1d-dscp mapping-template This command sets the mapping template to use for the WMM 802.1d to DSCP priority mapping on a VAP interface. Syntax qos 802.1d-dscp mapping-template <template-id>
template-id - The identifying number of a QoS mapping template.
(Range: 1-8) Default 1 Command Mode Interface Configuration (Wireless-VAP) Command Usage The AP supports eight QoS priority mapping templates, each identified by an ID number (1 to 8). The templates also have user-defined name that can be configured using the qos qos-template qos-template-name command. The QoS priority mapping templates can be configured using the qos qos-
template qos-template-priority command. Example AP(if-wireless 0: VAP[0])# qos 802.1d-dscp mapping-template 3 This setting has not been effective !
If want to take effect, please execute make-security-effective command !
AP(if-wireless 0: VAP[0])#
267 Chapter 31 | QoS Commands qos qos-template qos-
template-name This command sets the name of a QoS priority mapping template. Syntax qos qos-template qos-template-name <template-id> <template-name>
template-id - The identifying number of a QoS mapping template.
(Range: 1-8) template-name - The user-defined name of a QoS mapping template.
(Maximum 32 alphanumeric characters; can include - and _) Default ID 1: default_up_mapping_1 ID 2: default_up_mapping_2 ID 3: default_up_mapping_3 ID 4: default_up_mapping_4 ID 5: default_up_mapping_5 ID 6: default_up_mapping_6 ID 7: default_up_mapping_7 ID 8: default_up_mapping_8 Command Mode Interface Configuration (Wireless-VAP) Example AP(if-wireless 0: VAP[0])# qos qos-template qos-template-name 3 test-template AP(if-wireless 0: VAP[0])#
qos qos-template qos-
template-priority This command configures priority values in a QoS priority mapping template. Syntax qos qos-template qos-template-priority <template-id> <prirority-list>
template-id - The identifying number of a QoS mapping template.
(Range: 1-8) prirority-list - The mapped priority values a QoS mapping template.
(Range: 0-7; the list is enterd as a sequence of eight numbers, for example 01234567) Default 01234567 Command Mode Interface Configuration (Wireless-VAP) 268 Chapter 31 | QoS Commands Example AP(if-wireless 0: VAP[0])# qos qos-template qos-template-priority 1 10234765 AP(if-wireless 0: VAP[0])#
qos qos-template qos-
template-show This command displays the user-defined QoS priority mapping templates and their priority mapping configuration. Syntax qos qos-template qos-template-show Default none Command Mode Interface Configuration (Wireless-VAP) Example AP(if-wireless 0: VAP[0])# qos qos-template qos-template-show
----------Qos Mapping Template---------------
id priority name 1 10234765 test-template 2 01234567 default_up_mapping_2 3 01234567 default_up_mapping_3 4 01234567 default_up_mapping_4 5 01234567 default_up_mapping_5 6 01234567 default_up_mapping_6 7 01234567 default_up_mapping_7 8 01234567 default_up_mapping_8
----------Qos Mapping Template---------------
AP(if-wireless 0: VAP[0])#
269 Chapter 31 | QoS Commands 270 Section IV Appendices This section provides additional information and includes these items:
Troubleshooting on page 272 271 A Troubleshooting Problems Accessing the Management Interface Table 30: Troubleshooting Chart Symptom Action Cannot connect using Telnet, web browser, or SNMP software Cannot access the CLI through a serial port connection Be sure the AP is powered up. Check network cabling between the management station and the AP. Check that you have a valid network connection to the AP and that intermediate switch ports have not been disabled. Be sure you have configured the AP with a valid IP address, subnet mask and default gateway. Be sure the management station has an IP address in the same subnet as the APs IP. If you are trying to connect to the AP using a tagged VLAN group, your management station, and the ports connecting intermediate switches in the network, must be configured with the appropriate tag. If you cannot connect using Telnet, you may have exceeded the maximum number of concurrent Telnet/SSH sessions permitted. Try connecting again at a later time. Be sure you have set the terminal emulator program to VT100 compatible, 8 data bits, 1 stop bit, no parity, and the baud rate set to 115200 bps. Check that the null-modem serial cable conforms to the pin-out connections provided in the Installation Guide. Forgot or lost the password Reset the AP to factory defaults using its Reset button. Using System Logs If a fault does occur, refer to the Installation Guide to ensure that the problem you encountered is actually caused by the AP. If the problem appears to be caused by the AP, follow these steps:
1. Enable logging. 2. Set the error messages reported to include all categories. 3. Enable SNMP. 4. Enable SNMP traps. 272 Appendix A | Troubleshooting Using System Logs 5. Designate the SNMP host that is to receive the error messages. 6. Repeat the sequence of commands or other actions that lead up to the error. 7. Make a list of the commands or circumstances that led to the fault. Also make a list of any error messages displayed. 8. Set up your terminal emulation software so that it can capture all console output to a file. Then enter the show config command to record all system settings in this file. 9. Contact your distributors service engineer, and send a detailed description of the problem, along with the file used to record your system settings. For example:
AP(config)#logging on AP(config)#logging host 1 10.1.0.3 AP(config)#logging level alert AP(config)#snmp-server host 1 10.1.0.23 batman
... 273 Index of CLI Commands 802.1x enable 173 802.1x reauthentication-time 174 a-mpdu 208 a-msdu 209 antenna-chain 222 apmgmgtui ssh enable 124 apmgmtip 129 apmgmtui http port 126 apmgmtui http server 126 apmgmtui http session-timeout 127 apmgmtui https port 127 apmgmtui https server 128 apmgmtui snmp 129 apmgmtui ssh port 125 apmgmtui telnet-server enable 125 assoc-timeout-interval 219 auth 232 auth-timeout-interval 220 bandwidth-control downlink 225 bandwidth-control downlink rate 225 bandwidth-control uplink 226 bandwidth-control uplink rate 226 beacon-interval 214 bridge mac-aging 191 bridge stp br-conf forwarding-delay 186 bridge stp br-conf hello-time 187 bridge stp br-conf max-age 187 bridge stp br-conf priority 188 bridge stp port-conf interface 188 bridge stp service 186 bridge-link path-cost 189 bridge-link port-priority 189 channel 209 cipher-suite 237 client-assoc-preempt 218 cli-session-timeout 116 closed-system 217 configure 115 copy 165 country 120 dhcp-relay server 149 disable-coexist 212 dns 200 dtim-period 214 dual-image 164 encryption 234 end 116 exit 116 filter acl-destination-address 181 filter acl-source-address 181 filter dhcp 180 filter ethernet-type enabled 182 filter ethernet-type protocol 182 filter local-bridge 179 filter restrict-management 180 interface ethernet 199 interface wireless 207 interfere-chan-recover 221 ip address 200 ip dhcp 201 ip management address 202 ipv6 address 202 ipv6 dhcp 203 key 235 link-integrity 247 link-integrity link-fail-action 248 lldp service 250 lldp transmit delay-to-local-change 252 lldp transmit interval 251 lldp transmit re-init-delay 252 lldp-transmit hold-muliplier 251 logging clear 141 logging console 140 logging host 140 logging level 141 logging on 139 long-distance 222 long-distance acktimeout 224 long-distance ctstimeout 224 long-distance reference-data 223 long-distance slottime 223 mac-authentication server 175 mac-authentication server local address default 176 mac-authentication server local address delete 177 mac-authentication server local address entry 176 mac-authentication session-timeout 178 make-radius-effective 171 make-rf-setting-effective 212 make-security-effective 239 management-vlanid 255 max-association 218 max-client 217 min-allowed-rate 211 multicast-enhance 220 native-vlanid 256 password 123 path-cost (STP Interface) 190 ping 117 pmksa-lifetime 239 port-priority (STP Interface) 191 274 Index of CLI Commands preamble 213 prompt 121 qos 802.1d-802.1p 265 qos 802.1d-802.1p mapping-template 265 qos 802.1d-dscp 266 qos 802.1d-dscp mapping-template 267 qos qos-template qos-template-name 268 qos qos-template qos-template-priority 268 qos qos-template qos-template-show 269 qos vap-802.1p 263 qos vap-802.1p retagged-user-priority 264 radius-server accounting address 169 radius-server accounting key 170 radius-server accounting port 170 radius-server accounting timeout-interim 171 radius-server address 168 radius-server enable 167 radius-server key 169 radius-server port 168 reboot-schedule 124 reset 118 rogue-ap add friendly 242 rogue-ap delete friendly 243 rogue-ap disable 242 rogue-ap duration 243 rogue-ap enable 241 rogue-ap instant-scan 245 rogue-ap interval 244 rts-threshold 215 short-guard-interval 213 show apmanagement 130 show authentication 178 show bridge br-conf 192 show bridge forward address 195 show bridge mac-aging 196 show bridge port-conf interface 193 show bridge status 194 show bridge stp 192 show config 132 show dual-image 166 show event-log 142 show filters 183 show interface ethernet 205 show interface wireless 227 show line 118 show link-integrity 249 show lldp 253 show logging 142 show radius 172 show rogue-ap 245 show snmp 161 show snmp filter 161 show snmp target 160 show snmp users 160 show snmp vacm group 163 show snmp vacm view 162 show sntp 147 show station 228 show station statistics 229 show system 130 show system resource 131 show version 132 show wds wireless 198 shutdown (VAP) 221 shutdown (Ethernet) 204 snmp-server community 152 snmp-server contact 152 snmp-server enable server 153 snmp-server filter 159 snmp-server host 154 snmp-server location 153 snmp-server target 158 snmp-server trap 155 snmp-server user 157 snmp-server vacm group 156 snmp-server vacm view 155 sntp-server date-time 145 sntp-server daylight-saving 146 sntp-server enabled 145 sntp-server ip 144 sntp-server timezone 147 ssid 216 system name 122 system-resource 122 transmit-key 236 transmit-power 210 vap 208 vap (STP Interface) 190 vlan 254 vlan-id 256 wds ap 197 wds sta 197 wmm 258 wmm-acknowledge-policy 259 wmmparam 259 wpa-pre-shared-key 238 275 Index A authentication cipher suite 234 closed system 217 MAC address 176 type 217 B beacon interval 214 rate 214 BOOTP 200, 201, 202, 203 C channel 209 channel coexistance, disable 212 closed system 217 community name, configuring 152 community string 152 configuration settings, saving or restoring 165 console port, required connections 19 country code configuring 120 CTS 216 D data rates, allowed 211 device status, displaying 130 DHCP 200, 201, 202, 203, 204 DNS 200 Domain Name Server See DNS downloading software 165 DTIM 214 E event logs 142 F filter address 176 between wireless clients 179 local bridge 179 local or remote 175 management access 180 protocol types 182 VLANs 254 firmware displaying version 132 upgrading 165 G gateway address 24, 200, 202 H hardware version, displaying 132 HTTPS 128 I IEEE 802.11a 207 configuring interface 207 radio channel 209 IEEE 802.11g radio channel 209 IEEE 802.1x 173 configuring 173 initial configuration 24 introduction 18 IP address 28, 35, 37 BOOTP/DHCP 200, 201, 202, 203 configuring 24, 200, 201, 202, 203 L log messages 140 server 140 M MAC address, authentication 176 276 Index O open system 217 P password configuring 123 management 123 port priority STA 189 R radio channel 802.11a interface 209 802.11g interface 209 RADIUS 167 RTS threshold 215 S Secure Socket Layer See SSL shared key 235 SNMP 151 community name 152 community string 152 enabling traps 153 trap destination 154 trap manager 154 SNTP 144 enabling client 145 server 144 software displaying version 132 downloading 165 SSID 216 SSL 128 STA interface settings 189??
path cost 189 port priority 189 startup files, setting 164 station status 228, 229 status displaying device status 130 displaying station status 228, 229 subnet mask 28, 29, 35, 36, 37 system clock, setting 145 system log enabling 139 server 140 system software, downloading from server 165 T time zone 147 transmit power, configuring 210 trap destination 154 trap manager 154 U upgrading software 165 user password 123 V VLAN configuration 254 W WEP WPA shared key 235 pre-shared key 238 277 Headquarters No. 1, Creation Rd. III Hsinchu Science Park Taiwan 30077 Tel: +886 3 5638888 Fax: +886 3 6686111
(for Asia-Pacific): Technical Support information at www.smc-asia.com www.smcnetworks.co.kr SMC2890W-AN, SMC2891W-AN www.smc.com
1 2 | User Manual - QSG | Users Manual | 672.44 KiB |
Quick Star t Guide 802.11a/b/g/n Outdoor Dual-Band Wireless Access Point SMC2890W-AN / SMC2891W-AN The SMC2890W-AN and SMC2891W-AN are dual-band IEEE 802.a/b/g/n access points (APs) that are housed in a weatherproof enclosure for mounting outdoors. The units include a mounting bracket for attaching to a 1.5 to 6-inch pole and can be powered through their Ethernet cable connection from a power injector module that is installed indoors. SMC2890W-AN Provides four external antenna connectors only. SMC2891W-AN Provides three external antenna connectors and one built-
in 5 GHz high-gain antenna. Note: For detailed AP installation information, refer to the Installation Guide, which is on the Documentation CD included with the AP. Note: For Safety and Regulatory information, refer to the Safety and Regulatory Information document included with the AP. www.smc.com 1 E012013-CS-R01 150200000599A Quick Start Guide Follow the steps in this guide to install the AP in your network. Caution: The planning and installation of the AP requires professional personnel that are trained in the installation of radio transmitting equipment. The user is responsible for compliance with local regulations concerning items such as antenna power, use of lightning arrestors, grounding, and radio mast or tower construction. Therefore, it is recommended to consult a professional contractor knowledgeable in local radio regulations prior to equipment installation. 1. Unpack the AP Unpack the AP and check the package contents. SMC2890W-AN or SMC2891W-AN Outdoor Access Point Bracket Mounting Kit for pole mounting PoE power injector with power cordeither US, Continental Europe or UK Console cable (RJ-45 to DB-9) Waterproof RJ-45 port cover Quick Start Guide Regulatory and Safety Information Documentation CD includes Installation Guide and Management Guide 2. Mount the AP After planning your installation, mount the unit on a pole, mast, or tower using the mounting bracket. Also install the external antennas required for your wireless service. Pole Mounting 1 2 3 Attach one part of the bracket to the AP. Attach the other parts of the bracket to the pole. Link the two bracket parts together to secure the AP to the pole. 3 2 1 2 Quick Start Guide
.Attach External Antennas 1 Connect antennas either directly to the APs N-type connectors, or use RF coaxial cable provided in the antenna package. 1 3. Connect Cables Connect outdoor-rated Ethernet cable to the RJ-45 port and a grounding wire to the unit. Caution: Be sure that grounding is available and that it meets local and national electrical codes. Grounding the AP must be performed by a professional installer. 1 2 Connect outdoor-rated Category 5e or better cable to the RJ-45 port. Be sure to use the waterproof cover on the port. 1 2 3 Quick Start Guide 4. Connect Power Install the PoE power injector indoors. Connect the power injector to the Ethernet cable, a local LAN switch, and an AC power source. Caution: The power injector module is designed for indoor use only. Never mount the power injector outside with the AP unit. 1 1 2 3 Connect the power cord to a nearby AC power source (100-240 VAC, 50/60 Hz). Connect the Ethernet cable from the AP to the DATA & POWER OUT port on the power injector. Connect Ethernet cable from the DATA IN port on the power injector to a LAN switch. 2 3 Note: Connecting the Ethernet cable to the injector module powers on the unit. 5. Verify AP Operation Verify basic AP operation by checking the system LEDs. The Pwr/Sys LED should be on green, the Ethernet LED on/blinking orange, and the 2.4G and 5G LEDs on/blinking orange. 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 5 GHz link/activity LED. 2.4 GHz link/activity LED. LAN link/activity LED. Power/system LED. 4 6. Connect to the Console Port To make initial configuration changes to the AP, connect a PC to the APs console port using the included console cable. Quick Start Guide 1 2 3 Remove the waterproof cover from the Console port. Use the included RJ-45-to-DB-9 console cable. Connect to the APs console port. 3 1 2 From a PC running VT-100 terminal emulator software, use the following settings:
Baud rate 115,200 bps Character Size 8 Characters Parity None Stop bit One Data bits 8 Flow control none Log in to the command-line interface (CLI) using default settings:
Login Name admin Password null (there is no default password) For information on AP configuration and CLI commands, refer to the Management Guide, which is on the Documentation CD included with the AP. 5 Quick Start Guide Hardware Specifications Item Specification Chassis Specifications Size Weight Temperature Humidity Wind Velocity Network Interfaces Ports 2.4 GHz Radio 5 GHz Radio Radio Frequencies W x D x H: 195 x 190 x 74 mm (7.68 x 7.48 x 2.91 inches) 1.7 kg (3.75 lbs), unit without bracket or external antennas Operating: -10 C to 60 C (-14 F to 140 F) Storage: -20 C to 70 C (-4 F to 158 F) Operating: 10% to 95% (non-condensing) Operational: 100 MPH (Miles per hour) / 44 mps Survival: 150 MPH / 66 mps One RJ-45 Port: 1000BASE-T, PoE (PD) IEEE 802.11b/g/n IEEE 802.11a/n 2400 ~ 2483.5 MHz 2412 ~ 2472 MHz 5745 ~ 5825 MHz (China) 5180 ~ 5320 MHz (ETSI) 5500 ~ 5700 MHz (ETSI) Power Supply Specifications PoE Input Power 38~57 VDC Power Consumption 25.5 W maximum for IEEE 802.3at 12.95 W maximum for IEEE 802.3af Power Injector Module 100-240 VAC, 50-60 Hz, auto-sensing Regulatory Compliances Radio ETSI 300 328 (802.11b/g) ETSI 301 893 (802.11a Full range) ETSI 301 489 (DC power) FCC Part 15C 15.247/15.207 (2.4-2.4835GHz, 5.725-5.850GHz) FCC Part 15E 15.407 (5.150GHz-5.250GHz) Emissions Immunity Safety EN 55022:2007, Class A/B IEC 61000-3-2/3 FCC Class B Part 15 EN 55024:2001 + A2:2003 IEC 61000-4-2/3/4/5/6/8/11 UL/CUL (CSA/UL60950-1, CSA/UL60950-22) CB (IEC60950-1, IEC60950-22) 6
1 2 | User Manual - Statements | Users Manual | 254.15 KiB |
Safety and Regulator y Information 802.11a/b/g/n Outdoor Dual-Band Wireless Access Point SMC2890W-AN / SMC2891W-AN This document provides information on switch safety, regulatory statements and compliances. It includes these sections:
Compliances and Safety Statements on page 1 Warnings and Cautionary Messages on page 7 Compliances and Safety Statements FCC Class B This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. This transmitter must not be co-
located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one of the following measures:
Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help FCC Caution: Any changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate this equipment. www.smc.com 1 E012013-CS-R01 150200000598A Safety and Regulatory Information This transmitter must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter. For operation within 5.15 ~ 5.25GHz frequency range, it is restricted to indoor environment. This device meets all the other requirements specified in Part 15E, Section 15.407 of the FCC Rules. Radiation Exposure Statement:
This equipment complies with FCC radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled environment. This equipment should be installed and operated with minimum distance 20 cm between the radiator and your body. Professional Installation Instructions 1. Installation personal This product is designed for specific applications and needs to be installed by a qualified person who has RF and related rules knowledge. The general user shall not attempt to install or change the settings. 2. Installation location The product shall be installed at a location where the radiating antenna can be kept 20 cm from nearby persons in normal operation conditions to meet regulatory RF exposure requirements. 3. External antenna Use only the antennas that have been approved by the applicant. Non-approved antenna(s) may produce unwanted spurious or excessive RF transmitting power, which may lead to the violation of FCC/IC limits and is prohibited. 4. Installation procedure Please refer to user's manual for details. 5. Warning Please carefully select the installation position and make sure that the final output power does not exceed the limits set forcth in relevant rules. Violation of the rules could lead to serious federal penalties. Instructions d'installation professionnelle 1. Installation Ce produit est destine a un usage specifique et doit etre installe par un personnel qualifie maitrisant les radiofrequences et les regles s'y rapportant. L'installation et les reglages ne doivent pas etre modifies par l'utilisateur final. 2 Safety and Regulatory Information 2. Emplacement d'installation En usage normal, afin de respecter les exigences reglementaires concernant l'exposition aux radiofrequences, ce produit doit etre installe de facon a respecter une distance de 20 cm entre l'antenne emettrice et les personnes. 3. Antenn externe. Utiliser uniiquement les antennes approuvees par le fabricant. L'utilisation d'autres antennes peut conduire a un niveau de rayonnement essentiel ou non essentiel depassant les niveaux limites definis par FCC/IC, ce qui est interdit. 4. Procedure d'installation Consulter le manuel d'utilisation. 5. Avertissement Choisir avec soin la position d'installation et s'assurer que la puissance de sortie ne depasse pas les limites en vigueur. La violation de cette regle peut conduire a de serieuses penalites federales. CE Mark CE Mark Declaration of Conformance for EMI and Safety (EEC) This is a class B product. In a domestic environment, this product may cause radio interference, in which case the user may be required to take adequate measures. National Restrictions This device is intended for home and office use in all EU countries (and other countries following the EU directive 1999/5/EC) without any limitation except for the countries mentioned below:
Country Bulgaria France Restriction Reason/Remark None General authorization required for outdoor use and public service Outdoor use limited to 10 mW e.i.r.p. within the band 2454-2483.5 MHz Military Radiolocation use. Refarming of the 2.4 GHz band has been ongoing in recent years to allow current relaxed regulation. Full implementation planned 2012 italy None Luxembourg None Norway Implemented If used outside of own premises, general authorization is required General authorization required for network and service supply(not for spectrum) This subsection does not apply for the geographical area within a radius of 20 km from the centre of Ny-lesund Russian Federation None Only for indoor applications Note: Do not use the product outdoors in France. 3 Safety and Regulatory Information Europe - EU Declaration of Conformity This device complies with the essential requirements of the R&TTE Directive 1999/
5/EC. The following test methods have been applied in order to prove presumption of conformity with the essential requirements of the R&TTE Directive 1999/5/EC:
EN 60950-1:2006 + A11: 2009 Safety of Information Technology Equipment. EN 300 328 V1.7.1: 2006-10 Electromagnetic compatibility and Radio spectrum Matters (ERM); Wideband transmission systems; Data transmission equipment operating in the 2,4 GHz ISM band and using wide band modulation techniques; Harmonized EN covering essential requirements under article 3.2 of the R&TTE Directive. EN 301 489-17 V1.8.1/ 2008-04 EN 301 489-17 V2.1.1/ 2009-05 Electromagnetic compatibility and Radio spectrum Matters (ERM);
Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) standard for radio equipment and services; Part 17: Specific conditions for 2.4 GHz wideband transmission systems and 5 GHz high performance RLAN equipment. EN 55022: 2006 + A1: 2007 Limits and methods of measurement of radio disturbance characteristics of information technology equipment. EN 55024: 1998 + A1: 2001 + A2: 2003 Information technology equipment immunity characteristics limits and methods of measurement. EN 62311: 2008 Assessment of electronic and electrical equipment related to human exposure restrictions for electromagnetic fields (0 Hz - 300 GHz). This device is a 2.4 GHz wideband transmission system (transceiver), intended for use in all EU member states and EFTA countries, except in France and Italy where restrictive use applies. In Italy the end-user should apply for a license at the national spectrum authorities in order to obtain authorization to use the device for setting up outdoor radio links and/or for supplying public access to telecommunications and/or network services. This device may not be used for setting up outdoor radio links in France and in some areas the RF output power may be limited to 10 mW EIRP in the frequency range of 2454 - 2483.5 MHz. For detailed information the end-user should contact the national spectrum authority in France. 4 Safety and Regulatory Information This equipment may be operated in:
Bulgarian Czech esky Danish Dansk Dutch Nederlands English Estonian Eesti Finnish Suomi French Franais German Deutsch Greek Hungarian Magyar Italian Italiano Latvian Latviski
, SMC , 1999/5/
EC. SMC tmto prohlauje, e tento Radio LAN device je ve shod se zkladnmi poadavky a dalmi pslunmi ustanovenmi smrnice 1999/5/ES. Undertegnede SMC erklrer herved, at flgende udstyr Radio LAN device overholder de vsentlige krav og vrige relevante krav i direktiv 1999/5/EF Hierbij verklaart SMC dat het toestel Radio LAN device in overeenstemming is met de essentile eisen en de andere relevante bepalingen van richtlijn 1999/5/EG Bij deze Accton dat deze Radio LAN device voldoet aan de essentile eisen en aan de overige relevante bepalingen van Richtlijn 1999/5/EC. Hereby, SMC, declares that this Radio LAN device is in compliance with the essential requirements and other relevant provisions of Directive 1999/5/EC. Kesolevaga kinnitab SMC seadme Radio LAN device vastavust direktiivi 1999/5/E phinuetele ja nimetatud direktiivist tulenevatele teistele asjakohastele stetele. Valmistaja SMC vakuuttaa tten ett Radio LAN device tyyppinen laite on direktiivin 1999/
5/EY oleellisten vaatimusten ja sit koskevien direktiivin muiden ehtojen mukainen. Par la prsente SMC dclare que l'appareil Radio LAN device est conforme aux exigences essentielles et aux autres dispositions pertinentes de la directive 1999/5/CE Hiermit erklrt SMC, dass sich dieser/diese/dieses Radio LAN device in bereinstimmung mit den grundlegenden Anforderungen und den anderen relevanten Vorschriften der Richtlinie 1999/5/EG befindet". (BMWi) Hiermit erklrt SMC die bereinstimmung des Gertes Radio LAN device mit den grundlegenden Anforderungen und den anderen relevanten Festlegungen der Richtlinie 1999/5/EG. (Wien) SMC radio LAN device 1999/5/. Alulrott, SMC nyilatkozom, hogy a Radio LAN device megfelel a vonatkoz alapvet kvetelmnyeknek s az 1999/5/EC irnyelv egyb elrsainak. Con la presente SMC dichiara che questo Radio LAN device conforme ai requisiti essenziali ed alle altre disposizioni pertinenti stabilite dalla direttiva 1999/5/CE. Ar o SMC deklar, ka Radio LAN device atbilst Direktvas 1999/5/EK btiskajm prasbm un citiem ar to saisttajiem noteikumiem. Lithuanian Lietuvi iuo SMC deklaruoja, kad is Radio LAN device atitinka esminius reikalavimus ir kitas 1999/5/EB Direktyvos nuostatas. Maltese Malti Polish Polski Hawnhekk, SMC, jiddikjara li dan Radio LAN device jikkonforma mal-tiijiet essenzjali u ma provvedimenti orajn relevanti li hemm fid-Dirrettiva 1999/5/EC. Niniejszym SMC owiadcza, e Radio LAN device jest zgodny z zasadniczymi wymogami oraz pozostaymi stosownymi postanowieniami Dyrektywy 1999/5/EC. 5 Safety and Regulatory Information Portuguese Portugus SMC declara que este Radio LAN device est conforme com os requisitos essenciais e outras disposies da Directiva 1999/5/CE. Romanian Roman Slovak Slovensky Slovenian Slovensko Spanish Espaol Swedish Svenska Turkish Turk SMC declar c acest dispozitiv fr fir respect cerinele eseniale precum i alte dispoziii relevante ale Directivei 1999/5/EC. SMC tmto vyhlasuje, e Radio LAN device spa zkladn poiadavky a vetky prslun ustanovenia Smernice 1999/5/ES. SMC izjavlja, da je ta radio LAN device v skladu z bistvenimi zahtevami in ostalimi relevantnimi doloili direktive 1999/5/ES. Por medio de la presente SMC declara que el Radio LAN device cumple con los requisitos esenciales y cualesquiera otras disposiciones aplicables o exigibles de la Directiva 1999/
5/CE Hrmed intygar SMC att denna Radio LAN device str I verensstmmelse med de vsentliga egenskapskrav och vriga relevanta bestmmelser som framgr av direktiv 1999/5/EG. SMC bu kablosuz cihazn temel gereksinimleri ve 1999/5/EC yonergesindeki ilgili koullar karladn beyan eder. NCC Statement
(Taiwan) 5.25 ~ 5.35GHz 6 Safety and Regulatory Information Warnings and Cautionary Messages Warning: This product does not contain any serviceable user parts. Warning: Installation and removal of the unit must be carried out by qualified personnel only. Warning: When connecting this device to a power outlet, connect the field ground lead on the tri-pole power plug to a valid earth ground line to prevent electrical hazards. Caution: Wear an anti-static wrist strap or take other suitable measures to prevent electrostatic discharge when handling this equipment. Caution: Do not plug a phone jack connector in the RJ-45 port. This may damage this device. Caution: Use only twisted-pair cables with RJ-45 connectors that conform to FCC standards. Caution: The planning and installation of the AP requires professional personnel that are trained in the installation of radio transmitting equipment. The user is responsible for compliance with local regulations concerning items such as antenna power, use of lightning arrestors, grounding, and radio mast or tower construction. Therefore, it is recommended to consult a professional contractor knowledgeable in local radio regulations prior to equipment installation. Caution: Do not install the power injector outdoors. The unit is for indoor installation only. Caution: Install lightning protection at the power injector end of the Ethernet cable, use a lightning arrestor immediately before the cable enters the building. Caution: Be sure that grounding is available and that it meets local and national electrical codes. Grounding the AP must be performed by a professional installer. Caution: Grounding the outdoor-rated Ethernet cable must be performed by a professional installer in conformance with local safety regulations. 7 Safety and Regulatory Information 8
frequency | equipment class | purpose | ||
---|---|---|---|---|
1 | 2013-02-20 | 5745 ~ 5825 | DTS - Digital Transmission System | Original Equipment |
2 | 5180 ~ 5240 | NII - Unlicensed National Information Infrastructure TX |
app s | Applicant Information | |||||
---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
1 2 | Effective |
2013-02-20
|
||||
1 2 | Applicant's complete, legal business name |
Edgecore Networks Corporation
|
||||
1 2 | FCC Registration Number (FRN) |
0020336723
|
||||
1 2 | Physical Address |
No.1 Creation Rd. III
|
||||
1 2 |
Hsinchu, N/A 30077
|
|||||
1 2 |
Taiwan
|
|||||
app s | TCB Information | |||||
1 2 | TCB Application Email Address |
c******@curtis-straus.com
|
||||
1 2 | TCB Scope |
A4: UNII devices & low power transmitters using spread spectrum techniques
|
||||
app s | FCC ID | |||||
1 2 | Grantee Code |
YZK
|
||||
1 2 | Equipment Product Code |
SMC2891WAN
|
||||
app s | Person at the applicant's address to receive grant or for contact | |||||
1 2 | Name |
L******** S******
|
||||
1 2 | Title |
PM
|
||||
1 2 | Telephone Number |
886 3******** Extension:
|
||||
1 2 | Fax Number |
886 ********
|
||||
1 2 |
l******@edge-core.com
|
|||||
app s | Technical Contact | |||||
n/a | ||||||
app s | Non Technical Contact | |||||
n/a | ||||||
app s | Confidentiality (long or short term) | |||||
1 2 | Does this application include a request for confidentiality for any portion(s) of the data contained in this application pursuant to 47 CFR § 0.459 of the Commission Rules?: | Yes | ||||
1 2 | Long-Term Confidentiality Does this application include a request for confidentiality for any portion(s) of the data contained in this application pursuant to 47 CFR § 0.459 of the Commission Rules?: | No | ||||
if no date is supplied, the release date will be set to 45 calendar days past the date of grant. | ||||||
app s | Cognitive Radio & Software Defined Radio, Class, etc | |||||
1 2 | Is this application for software defined/cognitive radio authorization? | No | ||||
1 2 | Equipment Class | DTS - Digital Transmission System | ||||
1 2 | NII - Unlicensed National Information Infrastructure TX | |||||
1 2 | Description of product as it is marketed: (NOTE: This text will appear below the equipment class on the grant) | 802.11a/b/g/n Outdoor Dual Band Wireless Access Point | ||||
1 2 | Related OET KnowledgeDataBase Inquiry: Is there a KDB inquiry associated with this application? | No | ||||
1 2 | Modular Equipment Type | Does not apply | ||||
1 2 | Purpose / Application is for | Original Equipment | ||||
1 2 | Composite Equipment: Is the equipment in this application a composite device subject to an additional equipment authorization? | Yes | ||||
1 2 | Related Equipment: Is the equipment in this application part of a system that operates with, or is marketed with, another device that requires an equipment authorization? | No | ||||
1 2 | Grant Comments | Power listed is the maximum combined conducted output power. This device must be professionally installed. Marketing to the General Public is prohibited. Only those antenna(s) tested with the device or similar antenna(s) with equal or lesser gain may be used with this transmitter. Use of other antennas may require a Class II Permissive Change filing. The antennas used for this transmitter must be installed to provide a separation distance of at least 20 cm from all persons and must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter. End-users must be provided with transmitter operating instructions and installers must be provided with antenna installation instructions for satisfying RF exposure compliance. | ||||
1 2 | Power listed is the maximum combined conducted output power. This device must be professionally installed. Marketing to the General Public is prohibited. Only those antenna(s) tested with the device or similar antenna(s) with equal or lesser gain may be used with this transmitter. Use of other antennas may require a Class II Permissive Change filing. The antennas used for this transmitter must be installed to provide a separation distance of at least 20 cm from all persons and must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter. End-users must be provided with transmitter operating instructions and installers must be provided with antenna installation instructions for satisfying RF exposure compliance. Operations in the 5.15-5.25GHz band are restricted to indoor usage only. | |||||
1 2 | Is there an equipment authorization waiver associated with this application? | No | ||||
1 2 | If there is an equipment authorization waiver associated with this application, has the associated waiver been approved and all information uploaded? | No | ||||
app s | Test Firm Name and Contact Information | |||||
1 2 | Firm Name |
Bureau Veritas CPS (H.K.) Ltd., Taoyuan Branch
|
||||
1 2 | Name |
R**** C********
|
||||
1 2 | Telephone Number |
+886-******** Extension:
|
||||
1 2 | Fax Number |
+886-********
|
||||
1 2 |
r******@tw.bureauveritas.com
|
|||||
Equipment Specifications | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
Line | Rule Parts | Grant Notes | Lower Frequency | Upper Frequency | Power Output | Tolerance | Emission Designator | Microprocessor Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
1 | 1 | 15C | CC MO | 2412 | 2462 | 0.148 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
1 | 2 | 15C | CC MO | 5745 | 5825 | 0.126 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Line | Rule Parts | Grant Notes | Lower Frequency | Upper Frequency | Power Output | Tolerance | Emission Designator | Microprocessor Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
2 | 1 | 15E | CC MO | 5180.00000000 | 5240.00000000 | 0.0170000 |
some individual PII (Personally Identifiable Information) available on the public forms may be redacted, original source may include additional details
This product uses the FCC Data API but is not endorsed or certified by the FCC